Onkyo Stereo Receiver TXNR525 User Manual

Contents  
Safety Information and Introduction ............2  
AV RECEIVER  
Table of Contents...........................................5  
Connections .................................................11  
Turning On & Basic Operations..................20  
Playback........................................................24  
Advanced Operations ..................................41  
Controlling Other Components...................57  
Appendix.......................................................63  
TX-NR525  
Instruction Manual  
Internet Radio Guide  
Remote Control Codes  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Safety Information and Introduction  
extended period, remove the power cord from the  
AC outlet.  
5. Preventing Hearing Loss  
For U.S. models  
FCC Information for User  
CAUTION:  
The user changes or modifications not expressly  
approved by the party responsible for compliance  
could void the user’s authority to operate the  
equipment.  
Precautions  
1. Recording Copyright—Unless it’s for personal  
use only, recording copyrighted material is illegal  
without the permission of the copyright holder.  
2. AC Fuse—The AC fuse inside the unit is not user-  
serviceable. If you cannot turn on the unit, contact  
your Onkyo dealer.  
Caution  
Excessive sound pressure from earphones and  
headphones can cause hearing loss.  
6. Batteries and Heat Exposure  
Warning  
Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall  
not be exposed to excessive heat as sunshine,  
fire or the like.  
3. Care—Occasionally you should dust the unit all  
over with a soft cloth. For stubborn stains, use a  
soft cloth dampened with a weak solution of mild  
detergent and water. Dry the unit immediately  
afterwards with a clean cloth. Don’t use abrasive  
cloths, thinners, alcohol, or other chemical  
solvents, because they may damage the finish or  
remove the panel lettering.  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply  
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to  
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed  
to provide reasonable protection against harmful  
interference in a residential installation.  
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate  
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used  
in accordance with the instructions, may cause  
harmful interference to radio communications.  
However, there is no guarantee that interference will  
not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment  
does cause harmful interference to radio or television  
reception, which can be determined by turning the  
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to  
correct the interference by one or more of the  
following measures:  
7. Never Touch this Unit with Wet Hands—Never  
handle this unit or its power cord while your hands  
are wet or damp. If water or any other liquid gets  
inside this unit, have it checked by your Onkyo  
dealer.  
8. Handling Notes  
4. Power  
• If you need to transport this unit, use the original  
packaging to pack it how it was when you  
originally bought it.  
• Do not leave rubber or plastic items on this unit  
for a long time, because they may leave marks  
on the case.  
• This unit’s top and rear panels may get warm  
after prolonged use. This is normal.  
• If you do not use this unit for a long time, it may  
not work properly the next time you turn it on, so  
be sure to use it occasionally.  
WARNING  
BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE  
FIRST TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SECTION  
CAREFULLY.  
AC outlet voltages vary from country to country.  
Make sure that the voltage in your area meets the  
voltage requirements printed on the unit’s rear  
panel (e.g., AC 230 V, 50 Hz or AC 120 V, 60 Hz).  
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
• Increase the separation between the equipment and  
receiver.  
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit  
different from that to which the receiver is  
connected.  
The power cord plug is used to disconnect this  
unit from the AC power source. Make sure that  
the plug is readily operable (easily accessible) at  
all times.  
For models with [POWER] button, or with both  
[POWER] and [ON/STANDBY] buttons:  
Pressing the [POWER] button to select OFF  
mode does not fully disconnect from the mains. If  
you do not intend to use the unit for an extended  
period, remove the power cord from the AC outlet.  
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV  
technician for help.  
For models with [ON/STANDBY] button only:  
Pressing the [ON/STANDBY] button to select  
Standby mode does not fully disconnect from the  
mains. If you do not intend to use the unit for an  
En-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Safety Information and Introduction  
Thank you for purchasing an Onkyo AV  
Receiver. Please read this manual thoroughly  
before making connections and plugging in the  
unit.  
Following the instructions in this manual will  
enable you to obtain optimum performance and  
listening enjoyment from your new AV Receiver.  
Please retain this manual for future reference.  
The wire which is coloured brown must be connected  
to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or  
coloured red.  
For Canadian Models  
NOTE: THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS  
COMPLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES-003.  
For models having a power cord with a polarized  
plug:  
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK,  
MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT,  
FULLY INSERT.  
IMPORTANT  
The plug is fitted with an appropriate fuse. If the fuse  
needs to be replaced, the replacement fuse must  
approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362 and have the  
same ampere rating as that indicated on the plug.  
Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the  
body of the fuse.  
If the power cord’s plug is not suitable for your socket  
outlets, cut it off and fit a suitable plug. Fit a suitable  
fuse in the plug.  
Modèle pour les Canadien  
REMARQUE: CET APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE DE  
LA CLASSE B EST CONFORME À LA NORME  
NMB-003 DU CANADA.  
Supplied Accessories  
Make sure you have the following accessories:  
Indoor FM antenna (page 18)  
Sur les modèles dont la fiche est polarisée:  
AM loop antenna (page 18)  
ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS  
ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS  
LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE  
CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER  
JUSQU’AU FOND.  
For European Models  
Power cord (Taiwanese models) (page 20)  
Speaker cable labels (page 11)  
Speaker setup microphone (page 22)  
Remote controller (RC-865M) and two batteries (AA/R6)  
Quick Start Guide  
Declaration of Conformity  
We declare, under our sole  
responsibility, that this product  
complies with the standards:  
–Safety  
For British models  
Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the  
power supply cord of this unit should be performed  
only by qualified service personnel.  
–Limits and methods of  
*
In catalogs and on packaging, the letter at the end of the  
measurement of radio disturbance characteristics  
–Limits for harmonic current emissions  
–Limitation of voltage changes, voltage fluctuations  
and flicker  
product name indicates the color. Specifications and  
operations are the same regardless of color.  
IMPORTANT  
The wires in the mains lead are coloured in  
accordance with the following code:  
Blue: Neutral  
–RoHS Directive, 2011/65/EU  
Brown: Live  
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this  
apparatus may not correspond with the coloured  
markings identifying the terminals in your plug,  
proceed as follows:  
The wire which is coloured blue must be connected to  
the terminal which is marked with the letter N or  
coloured black.  
En-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Safety Information and Introduction  
Table of Contents  
Playback  
Controlling Other Components  
Playback......................................................................24  
Controlling Contents of USB or Network Devices.....25  
Understanding Icons on the Display.........................26  
Playing an iPod/iPhone via USB...............................26  
Playing a USB Device...............................................27  
Listening to TuneIn ...................................................27  
Registering Other Internet Radio..............................28  
Playing Music Files on a Server (DLNA) ..................29  
Playing Music Files on a Shared Folder ...................30  
Remote Playback......................................................31  
Playing Audio and Video from Separate Sources.....34  
Using the Listening Modes .......................................35  
Displaying Source Information..................................39  
Using the Sleep Timer ..............................................39  
Setting the Display Brightness..................................39  
Changing the Input Display.......................................39  
Muting the AV Receiver............................................39  
Using the Home Menu..............................................40  
Controlling Other Components................................. 57  
Preprogrammed Remote Control Codes.................. 57  
Entering Remote Control Codes............................... 57  
Remapping Colored Buttons .................................... 57  
Remote Control Codes  
for Onkyo Components Connected via RI ............. 58  
Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons................... 58  
Resetting the Remote Controller .............................. 58  
Controlling Other Components................................. 58  
Using the Onkyo Dock.............................................. 61  
Controlling Your iPod/iPhone ................................... 62  
Safety Information and Introduction  
Important Safety Instructions......................................2  
Precautions ...................................................................3  
Supplied Accessories...................................................4  
Table of Contents..........................................................5  
Features.........................................................................6  
Front & Rear Panels......................................................7  
Front Panel..................................................................7  
Rear Panel ..................................................................9  
Remote Controller.......................................................10  
Controlling the AV Receiver......................................10  
Appendix  
Troubleshooting......................................................... 63  
Firmware Update ........................................................ 68  
About HDMI................................................................. 71  
Network/USB Features............................................... 72  
License and Trademark Information ........................ 74  
Specifications............................................................. 75  
Connections  
Connecting the AV Receiver......................................11  
Connecting Your Speakers .......................................11  
Connecting the TV/AV components..........................14  
About RIHD-compatible components........................15  
Operations that can be performed  
with RIHD connection.............................................16  
Confirm the settings ..................................................16  
Connection Tips ........................................................17  
Connecting the Antennas..........................................18  
Connecting Onkyo RI Components...........................19  
Using Headphones....................................................19  
Advanced Operations  
To reset the AV receiver, see page 63.  
On-screen Setup.........................................................41  
Using the Quick Setup..............................................41  
Using the Audio Settings of Quick Setup..................42  
Using the Setup Menu (HOME)................................44  
Setup Menu Items.....................................................44  
1. HDMI Input............................................................45  
2. Component (Component Video Input)..................46  
3. Digital Audio (Digital Audio Input).........................46  
4. Sp Config (Speaker Configuration).......................46  
5. Sp Distance (Speaker Distance)...........................47  
6. Level Cal (Level Calibration).................................48  
7. Audio Adjust..........................................................48  
8. Source Setup........................................................49  
10. HDMI Setup ........................................................52  
11. Network Setup ....................................................54  
Zone 2..........................................................................56  
Making Zone 2 Connections.....................................56  
Controlling Zone 2 Components...............................56  
Turning On & Basic Operations  
Turning On/Off the AV Receiver................................20  
Connecting the Power Cord......................................20  
Turning On ................................................................20  
Turning Off ................................................................20  
About the HYBRID STANDBY indicator....................20  
Using the Automatic Speaker Setup .........................21  
En-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Safety Information and Introduction  
Connections  
Miscellaneous  
• 40 FM/AM Presets  
Features  
• 6 HDMI Inputs and 1 Output  
Amplifier  
®
• 4K Passthrough-compatible HDMI Inputs  
• Onkyo pfor System Control  
• 3 Digital Inputs (1 Optical/2 Coaxial)  
• Component Video Switching (2 Inputs/1 Output)  
• Banana Plug-Compatible Speaker Posts  
• Audyssey MultEQ to correct room acoustic  
problems  
• 80 Watts/Channel @ 8 ohms (FTC)  
• 130 Watts/Channel @ 6 ohms (IEC)  
• 160 Watts/Channel @ 6 ohms (JEITA)  
• WRAT–Wide Range Amplifier Technology  
(5 Hz to 100 kHz bandwidth)  
• Optimum Gain Volume Circuitry  
• H.C.P.S. (High Current Power Supply) Massive  
High Power Transformer  
®
• Audyssey Dynamic EQ for loudness correction  
• Audyssey Dynamic Volume to maintain optimal  
listening level and dynamic range  
(40/50/60/70/80/90/100/120/150/200 Hz)  
• A/V Sync Control Function (up to 400 ms)  
• Auto Standby Function  
®
*
In Europe, using banana plugs to connect speakers to an  
audio amplifier is prohibited.  
• Internet Radio Connectivity  
• Network Capability for Streaming Audio Files  
• 2 USB Inputs (Front/Rear) for Memory Devices and  
• On-Screen Display via HDMI  
®
®
iPod /iPhone models  
• Preprogrammed u-Compatible Remote  
Processing  
* Only the front-panel USB input is compatible with  
iPod/iPhone, Onkyo wireless LAN adapter UWF-1, and  
Onkyo Bluetooth USB adapter UBT-1.  
• HDMI (Audio Return Channel, 3D, DeepColor,  
x.v.Color, Lip Sync, 4K Passthrough, DTS-HD  
Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,  
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DSD and Multi-  
CH PCM)  
• Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio  
• Non-Scaling Configuration  
• A-Form Listening Mode Memory  
• Direct Mode  
• Pure Audio Mode (European, Australian and Asian  
models)  
• Music Optimizer for Compressed Digital Music files  
• Phase Matching Bass System  
• 192 kHz/24-bit D/A Converters  
• Powerful and Highly Accurate 32-bit Processing  
DSP  
• Jitter Cleaning Circuit Technology  
En-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Safety Information and Introduction  
Front & Rear Panels  
Front Panel  
(North American and Taiwanese models)  
(European, Australian and Asian models)  
a
b c  
d e  
f g h i j k l  
m
v
w
n o  
p
q
r
u
s t  
For detailed information, see the pages in  
parentheses.  
h TUNING MODE button (32)  
i DISPLAY button (39)  
j HOME button (40)  
p TONE and Tone Level buttons (42)  
q Input selector buttons (24)  
r AUX INPUT AUDIO/VIDEO jacks  
s USB port (26, 27)  
a 8ON/STANDBY button (20)  
b ZONE 2, OFF buttons (56)  
c Remote control sensor (10)  
d Display (8)  
k TUNING q/w(32), PRESET e/r(32), cursor  
and ENTER buttons  
t SETUP MIC jack (22)  
l RETURN button  
u HYBRID STANDBY indicator (20)  
e LISTENING MODE buttons (35)  
m MASTER VOLUME control (24)  
v PURE AUDIO button and indicator (European,  
f DIMMER button (North American and  
n MUSIC OPTIMIZER button and indicator (North  
Australian and Asian models) (35)  
Taiwanese models) (39)  
American and Taiwanese models) (43)  
w RT/PTY/TP button (European, Australian and  
g MEMORY button (32)  
o PHONES jack (19)  
Asian models) (33)  
En-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Safety Information and Introduction  
Display  
s
ab cd  
e
f g  
h i  
j k lm j d  
n
o p q  
For detailed information, see the pages in  
parentheses.  
h Tuning indicators  
m NET indicator (27 to 30, 55)  
n Message area  
RDS indicator (excluding North American and  
Taiwanese models) (33)  
a Z2 (Zone 2) indicator (56)  
o SLEEP indicator (39)  
p Channel/Unit indicators  
ch indicator  
AUTO indicator (32)  
TUNED indicator (32)  
b 3D indicator  
This lights when a 3D input signal is detected.  
FM STEREO indicator (32)  
i MUTING indicator (39)  
j Input indicators (17)  
HDMI indicator (53)  
c Headphone indicator (19)  
Hz indicator  
d 1, 3and cursor indicators (26)  
e Listening mode and format indicators (35, 51)  
f Audyssey indicator (21, 49)  
m/ft indicator  
dB indicator  
q ASb (Auto Standby) indicator (52)  
DIGITAL indicator  
Dynamic EQ indicator (49)  
k ARC (Audio Return Ch) indicator (53)  
Dynamic Vol indicator (50)  
g M.Opt (Music Optimizer) indicator (43)  
En-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Safety Information and Introduction  
Rear Panel  
(North American, European, Australian and Asian models)  
(Taiwanese models)  
a bc d e  
f
g h  
n
i
j
k lm  
See “Connecting the AV Receiver” for connection  
(pages 11 to 19).  
h Power cord (North American, European,  
Australian and Asian models)  
a u REMOTE CONTROL jack  
b COMPONENT VIDEO IN and OUT jacks  
c USB port  
i DIGITAL IN COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks  
j Composite video and analog audio jacks  
(BD/DVD IN, CBL/SAT IN, GAME IN, PC IN,  
TV/CD IN)  
d ETHERNET port  
k MONITOR OUT V jack  
e FM ANTENNA jack and AM ANTENNA terminal  
f HDMI IN and OUT jacks  
l ZONE 2 LINE OUT jacks  
m SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jacks  
n AC INLET (Taiwanese models)  
g SPEAKERS terminals  
(CENTER, FRONT, SURROUND)  
En-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Safety Information and Introduction  
*2  
These buttons can also be used when a REMOTE  
MODE other than Receiver mode is selected.  
For detailed information, see the pages in  
parentheses.  
Remote Controller  
a 8RECEIVER button (20)  
Aiming the remote controller  
To use the remote controller, point it at the AV  
receiver’s remote control sensor, as shown below.  
Controlling the AV Receiver  
b REMOTE MODE/INPUT SELECTOR buttons  
(24)  
To control the AV receiver, press RECEIVER to  
select Receiver mode.  
c q/w/e/rand ENTER buttons  
d Q SETUP button (41)  
e Listening Mode buttons (35)  
f DIMMER button (39)  
g MUTING button (39)  
h DISPLAY button (39)  
i VOL q/wbutton (24)  
j RETURN button  
Remote control sensor  
AV receiver  
a*2  
b*2  
*1  
RECEIVER  
Approx. 16 ft. (5 m)  
hc  
i*2  
Installing the batteries  
k HOME button (40)  
l SLEEP button (39)  
d
Tip  
• You can also use the remote controller to control Onkyo  
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, CD player, and other  
components.  
See “Entering Remote Control Codes” for more details  
(page 57).  
ac  
j
k
d
Controlling the tuner  
To control the AV receiver’s tuner, press AM or FM  
(or RECEIVER).  
e
Batteries (AA/R6)  
a q/wbuttons (32)  
b D.TUN button (32)  
c DISPLAY button  
d CH +/– button (33)  
e Number buttons (32)  
e
Note  
• If the remote controller doesn’t work reliably, try replacing  
the batteries.  
• Don’t mix new and old batteries or different types of  
batteries.  
bf  
l
• If you intend not to use the remote controller for a long time,  
remove the batteries to prevent damage from leakage or  
corrosion.  
• Remove expired batteries as soon as possible to prevent  
damage from leakage or corrosion.  
*1  
To control a component, you must first enter the remote  
control code.  
See “Entering Remote Control Codes” for more details  
(page 57).  
En-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Connections  
Speaker Configuration  
Tip  
• If your subwoofer is unpowered and you’re using an  
external amplifier, connect the subwoofer pre out jack to an  
input on the amplifier.  
The following table indicates the channels you should  
use depending on the number of speakers that you  
have.  
No matter how many speakers you use, a powered  
subwoofer is recommended for a really powerful and  
solid bass.  
To get the best from your surround sound system,  
you need to set the speaker settings automatically  
(page 21) or manually (page 46).  
Connections  
Attaching the Speaker Cable Labels  
The speaker terminals are color-coded for  
identification purpose.  
Speaker  
Color  
White  
Red  
Front left  
Number of speakers  
Front speakers  
2
3
4
5
Front right  
Center  
Green  
Blue  
Connecting the AV  
Receiver  
Center speaker  
Surround left  
Surround right  
Surround speakers  
Gray  
Speaker Configuration  
5.1-channel:  
The supplied speaker cable labels are also color-  
coded and you should attach them to the positive (+)  
side of each speaker cable in accordance with the  
table above. Then all you need to do is to match the  
color of each label to the corresponding speaker  
terminal.  
Connecting Your Speakers  
a bcdef  
Using Powered Subwoofers  
a b  
c
f
Corner  
position  
1/3 of wall  
position  
To find the best position for your subwoofer, while  
playing a movie or some music with good bass,  
experiment by placing your subwoofer at various  
positions within the room, and choose the one that  
provides the most satisfying results.  
You can connect the powered subwoofer with two  
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jacks respectively.  
The same signal is output from each jack.  
de  
Front speakers  
Center speaker  
Surround speakers  
Subwoofer(s)  
a b  
c
de  
f
En-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Connections  
Before connecting the power cord, connect all of  
Connecting the Speaker Cables/Powered Subwoofers  
your speakers and AV components.  
Please connect a, b, c, d, eand ffor 5.1-channel surround.  
• Read the instructions supplied with your speakers.  
• By default, speakers for 5.1-channel surround are  
configured to use: front right/front left /center/  
surround right/surround left/subwoofer.  
a
Front  
speaker L  
b
Front  
speaker R  
Screw-type speaker terminals  
c
Center speaker  
Strip 1/2" to 5/8" (12 to 15 mm) of insulation from the  
ends of the speaker cables, and twist the bare wires  
tightly, as shown.  
1/2" to 5/8" (12 to 15 mm)  
Red  
Green  
White  
Banana Plugs (North American models)  
• If you are using banana plugs, tighten the speaker  
terminal before inserting the banana plug.  
• Do not insert the speaker code directly into the  
center hole of the speaker terminal.  
Blue  
Gray  
Powered  
subwoofer  
f
Powered  
subwoofer  
f
Surround  
speaker R  
e
Surround  
speaker L  
d
• Pay close attention to speaker wiring polarity. In other words, connect positive (+) terminals only to positive (+)  
terminals, and negative (–) terminals only to negative (–) terminals. If you get them the wrong way around, the  
sound will be out of phase and will sound unnatural.  
En-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connections  
Speaker Connection Precautions  
• You can connect speakers with an impedance of  
between 6 and 16 ohms. If you use speakers with a  
lower impedance, and use the amplifier at high  
volume levels for a long period of time, the built-in  
amp protection circuit may be activated.  
• Unnecessarily long, or very thin speaker cables may  
affect the sound quality and should be avoided.  
• Be careful not to short the positive and negative  
wires. Doing so may damage the AV receiver.  
• Make sure the metal core of the wire does not have  
contact with the AV receiver’s rear panel. Doing so  
may damage the AV receiver.  
• Don’t connect more than one cable to each speaker  
terminal. Doing so may damage the AV receiver.  
• Don’t connect one speaker to several terminals.  
En-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connections  
Connections  
Connecting the TV/AV components  
Use this jack to connect to the HDMI input of the  
TV. If your TV doesn’t support Audio Return  
Channel (ARC) , you need to connect an optical  
A
Before connecting the power cord, connect all of your speakers and AV components. To display the setup  
menu on the TV screen, connecting the TV to the HDMI OUT is required.  
*1  
digital cable together with the HDMI cable to jack  
E.  
E
I F  
G
H
D
C
B
A
*1  
ARC is the function that carries the audio signal  
from the TV to jack A. With ARC, a single HDMI  
cable can connect the TV and the AV receiver.  
Use this jack to connect to your Blu-ray Disc/DVD  
player, etc.  
B
C
D
F
Use this jack to connect to the Satellite/cable set-  
top box, etc.  
Use this jack to connect to the game consoles,  
etc.  
Use this port to connect to a LAN port on a router  
so the AV receiver can be connected to your  
home network.  
Use jack and terminal here to connect the  
supplied FM antenna and AM loop antenna.  
G
H
If you select the input selector button, the signal from  
the component connected to the assigned jack is  
played.  
• Before making any AV connections, read the  
manuals supplied with your AV components.  
• Push plugs in all the way to make good connections  
(loose connections can cause noise or  
malfunctions).  
Use this jack to make connections using an  
analog audio cable.  
With this connection, you can also enjoy analog  
audio from external components while you are in  
Zone 2.  
• To prevent interference, keep audio and video  
cables away from power cords and speaker cables.  
Use this jack to make connections using a  
component video cable.  
I
Input  
selector  
buttons  
Tip  
B
C
D
• To listen to the audio of a component connected via HDMI  
through your TV’s speakers, enable “HDMI Through”  
(page 53) and set the AV receiver to standby mode.  
• In the case of Blu-ray Disc/DVD players, if no sound is  
output despite following the above-mentioned procedure,  
set your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player’s HDMI audio settings to  
PCM.  
En-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Connections  
• If a phono equalizer is not installed on the turntable to  
connect, it has to be prepared separately. Use a phono  
equalizer which is compatible with the cartridge of the  
turntable.  
• Only the front-panel USB input is compatible with  
iPod/iPhone and Onkyo wireless LAN adapter UWF-1.  
UWF-1 can be used with the contents of not more than  
64 kHz, not compatible with Dolby TrueHD and DSD.  
Connecting to the Network (Optional)  
p
The AV receiver allows interoperability of the CEC  
(Consumer Electronics Control) specified in the HDMI  
standard, which is known as RIHD. Various linked  
operations can be performed by connecting the AV  
receiver to an RIHD-compatible TV, player, or  
recorder.  
The following diagram shows how you can connect  
the AV receiver to your home network. In this  
example, it’s connected to a LAN port on a router,  
which has a 4-port 100Base-TX switch built-in.  
Internet radio  
Default setting is set to off, so it is required to change  
the setting to on.  
WAN  
Router  
Modem  
LAN  
About RIHD-compatible components  
The following components are p-compatible  
(As of January 2013).  
TV  
• Sharp TV  
Computer or media server  
Do not connect the AV receiver’s USB port to a USB  
port on your computer. Music on your computer  
cannot be played through the AV receiver in this way.  
Players/Recorders  
• Onkyo and Integra p-compatible players  
• Toshiba players and recorders  
• Sharp players and recorders (only when used  
together with Sharp TV)  
The default of the assignment for the input selector buttons and jacks are as shown below. These settings can  
be changed. (The assignment for the composite video jacks and the analog audio jacks cannot be changed.)  
*
Models other than those mentioned above may have some  
interoperability if compatible with CEC, which is part of the  
HDMI Standard, but operation cannot be guaranteed.  
Input selector buttons HDMI jacks  
COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL IN COAXIAL Composite video and  
jacks  
COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL IN  
IN 1 COAXIAL 1  
COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL IN  
IN 2 COAXIAL 2  
and OPTICAL jacks  
analog audio jacks  
Note  
BD/DVD  
CBL/SAT  
GAME  
HDMI IN 1  
HDMI IN 2  
HDMI IN 3  
HDMI IN 4  
VIDEO/AUDIO IN  
BD/DVD  
• For proper linked operations, do not connect more  
p-compatible components than the quantities  
specified below, to the HDMI input terminal.  
Blu-ray Disc/DVD players: up to three.  
Blu-ray Disc/DVD recorders/Digital Video Recorders: up  
to three.  
Cable/Satellite Set-top boxes: up to four.  
• Do not connect the AV receiver to another AV receiver/AV  
amplifier via HDMI.  
VIDEO/AUDIO IN  
CBL/SAT  
VIDEO/AUDIO IN  
GAME  
PC  
VIDEO/AUDIO IN PC  
VIDEO/AUDIO IN AUX  
AUX  
TV/CD  
DIGITAL IN OPTICAL AUDIO IN TV/CD  
• Proper linked operations are not guaranteed when more  
p-compatible components than the above-  
mentioned quantities are connected.  
En-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Connections  
• On the TV, when you select anything other than the HDMI  
jack to which the AV receiver is connected, the input on the  
AV receiver will be switched to “TV/CD”.  
• The AV receiver will automatically power on in conjunction  
when it determines it to be necessary. Even if the AV  
receiver is connected to an pcompatible TV or  
player/recorder, it will not power on if it is not necessary. It  
may not power on in conjunction when the TV is set to  
Operations that can be performed with  
RIHD connection  
Confirm the settings  
1. Turn on the power for all connected components.  
2. Turn off the power of the TV, and confirm that the  
power of the connected components is turned off  
automatically with the link operation.  
3. Turn on the power of the Blu-ray Disc/DVD  
player/recorder.  
For p-compatible TV  
The following linked operations are enabled by  
connecting the AV receiver to an p-compatible  
TV.  
• The AV receiver will enter standby mode when the  
TV is set to standby.  
• Linked functions with the AV receiver may not work  
depending on the component model connected. In such  
cases, operate the AV receiver directly.  
4. Start playback on the Blu-ray Disc/DVD  
player/recorder, and verify the following:  
• You can set on the menu screen of the TV to either  
output the audio from the speakers connected to the  
AV receiver, or from the speakers of the TV.  
• It is possible to output the audio coming from the  
tuner or auxiliary input of your TV to the speakers of  
the AV receiver. (A connection such as an optical  
digital cable or similar is required in addition to the  
HDMI cable.)  
• Input to the AV receiver can be selected with the  
remote controller of the TV.  
• Operations such as volume adjustment or similar for  
the AV receiver can be performed from the remote  
controller of the TV.  
• The AV receiver automatically turns on, and  
selects the input to which the Blu-ray Disc/DVD  
player/recorder is connected.  
• The TV automatically turns on, and selects the  
input to which the AV receiver is connected.  
5. Following the operating instructions of the TV,  
select “Use the TV speakers” from the menu  
screen of the TV, and confirm that the audio is  
output from the speakers of the TV, and not from  
the speakers connected to the AV receiver.  
6. Select “Use the speakers connected from the AV  
receiver” from the menu screen of the TV, and  
confirm that the audio is output from the speakers  
connected to the AV receiver, and not from the TV  
speakers.  
For p-compatible players/recorders  
The following linked operations are enabled by  
connecting the AV receiver to an p-compatible  
player/recorder.  
Note  
• Audio from DVD-Audio or Super Audio CD may not output  
from the TV speakers. You will be able to output the audio  
from the TV speakers by setting the audio output of the  
DVD player to 2ch PCM. (It may not be possible depending  
on the player models.)  
• Even if you set to output audio on the TV speakers, audio  
will be output from the speakers connected to the AV  
receiver when you adjust the volume or switch the input on  
the AV receiver. To output audio from the TV speakers, re-  
do the corresponding operations on the TV.  
• In case of an pconnection with uand uaudio  
control compatible components, do not connect the u  
cable at the same time.  
• When playback is started on the player/recorder, AV  
receiver will switch to the HDMI input of the  
player/recorder that is playing back.  
• Operation of the player/recorder is possible using  
the remote controller supplied with the AV receiver.  
*
Depending on the model used, not all operations may be  
available.  
Note  
• Do not assign an HDMI IN to the TV/CD selector at this  
time, otherwise appropriate CEC (Consumer Electronics  
Control) operation will not be guaranteed.  
En-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Connections  
*2  
This is possible when “Audio Return Ch” is set to “Auto”  
(page 53), the TV/CD input selector is selected, and  
your TV is ARC capable.  
Video Signal Flow Chart  
Connection Tips  
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.  
The video and audio signal flow  
Tip  
Connect the AV receiver between the AV  
components and the TV. The signal from the AV  
components is carried through the AV receiver. You  
can enjoy the audio of the TV through the AV  
receiver.  
Composite  
Composite  
Component  
HDMI  
• When a signal is input via HDMI and the corresponding  
input selector is selected, the HDMI indicator lights. In the  
case of an optical or coaxial connection, the DIGITAL  
indicator lights. In the case of an analog connection, neither  
of the HDMI and DIGITAL indicators light.  
IN  
AV receiver  
MONITOR OUT  
Component  
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.  
AV Cables and Jacks  
HDMI  
TV, projector, etc.  
HDMI connections can carry digital video and audio.  
Video, audio  
AV receiver  
Audio components can be connected by using any of  
the following audio connection formats: analog,  
optical, coaxial, or HDMI.  
When choosing a connection format, bear in mind  
that the AV receiver does not convert digital input  
signals for analog line outputs and vice versa.  
Component video  
Component video separates the luminance (Y) and  
color difference signals (PB, PR), providing the best  
picture quality (some TV manufacturers label their  
component video sockets slightly differently).  
Audio  
Video, audio  
If signals are present at more than one input, the  
inputs will be selected automatically in the following  
order of priority: HDMI, digital, analog.  
TV, projector, etc.  
Green  
Blue  
Y
C
B/PB  
Note  
Audio Signal Flow Chart  
• The on-screen menus are displayed when:  
There is no video input, or  
C
R/PR  
Red  
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.  
The video input is 480p, 576p, 720p, 1080i, or 1080p.  
Composite video  
Analog  
Optical  
Coaxial  
HDMI  
Composite video is commonly used on TVs, DVDs,  
and other video equipment.  
Video components can be connected by using any  
one of the following video connection formats:  
composite video, component video, or HDMI, the  
latter offering the best picture quality.  
IN  
*1  
*1  
*1  
AV receiver  
Yellow  
OUT  
HDMI  
Optical digital audio  
*1  
*2  
When choosing a connection format, bear in mind  
that the AV receiver doesn’t convert between formats,  
so only outputs of the same format as the input will  
output the signal.  
Optical digital connections allow you to enjoy digital  
*1  
sound such as PCM , Dolby Digital or DTS. The  
TV, projector, etc.  
audio quality is the same as coaxial.  
*1  
Depends on the “Audio TV Out” setting (page 53).  
En-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Connections  
Coaxial digital audio  
Connecting the Antennas  
Coaxial digital connections allow you to enjoy digital  
*1  
sound such as PCM , Dolby Digital or DTS. The  
This section explains how to connect the supplied indoor FM antenna and AM loop antenna.  
audio quality is the same as optical.  
The AV receiver won’t pick up any radio signals without any antenna connected, so you must connect the  
antenna to use the tuner.  
Orange  
Analog audio (RCA)  
Analog audio connections (RCA) carry analog audio.  
(North American and  
Taiwanese models)  
(European,Australian  
and Asian models)  
White  
Red  
Insert the plug fully  
into the jack.  
Insert the plug fully  
into the jack.  
Push.  
Insert wire.  
Release.  
*1  
For PCM signals, the supported sampling rates are  
32/44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz. With HDMI connections, 176.4  
and 192 kHz are also supported.  
Assembling the AM loop antenna  
Caution  
Note  
• Be careful not to injure  
yourself when using  
thumbtacks.  
• The AV receiver does not support SCART plugs.  
• The AV receiver’s optical digital jacks have shutter-type  
covers that open when an optical plug is inserted and close  
when it’s removed. Push plugs in all the way.  
Thumbtacks, etc.  
Caution  
• To prevent shutter damage, hold the optical plug  
straight when inserting and removing.  
AM loop antenna (supplied)  
Indoor FM antenna (supplied)  
Note  
• Once your AV receiver is ready for use, you’ll need to tune into a radio station and position the antenna to achieve the best  
possible reception.  
• Keep the AM loop antenna as far away as possible from your AV receiver, TV, speaker cables, and power cords.  
Tip  
• If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available outdoor FM antenna  
instead.  
• If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied indoor AM loop antenna, try using it with a commercially available  
outdoor AM antenna.  
En-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Connections  
Connecting Onkyo RI Components  
Using Headphones  
Make sure that each Onkyo component is  
Connect a pair of stereo headphones with a  
standard plug (1/4 inch or ø 6.3 mm) to the  
PHONES jack.  
1
1
connected with an analog audio cable  
(connection H in the hookup examples)  
(page 14).  
While the headphones plug is inserted in the  
PHONES jack, =indicator lights.  
Make the uconnection (see the illustration).  
2
3
Note  
If you’re using an RI Dock, or cassette tape  
deck, change the Input Display (page 39).  
• Always turn down the volume before connecting your  
headphones.  
• While the headphones plug is inserted in the PHONES  
jack, the speakers are turned off. (The Zone 2  
speakers are not turned off.)  
• When you connect a pair of headphones, the listening  
mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,  
Mono, Direct, or Pure Audio (European, Australian  
and Asian models).  
• If you connect an iPod or iPhone to the USB port on  
the AV receiver, no sound will be output from the  
headphones jack.  
With u(Remote Interactive), you can use the  
R
L
following special functions:  
ANALOG  
AUDIO OUT  
e.g., cassette tape deck  
System On/Auto Power On  
When you start playback on a component  
connected via u, while the AV receiver is on  
standby, the AV receiver will automatically turn on  
and select that component as the input source.  
R
L
ANALOG  
AUDIO OUT  
RI Dock  
Direct Change  
When playback is started on a component  
connected via u, the AV receiver automatically  
selects that component as the input source.  
You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to  
control your other u-capable Onkyo components,  
pointing the remote controller at the AV receiver’s  
remote control sensor instead of the component.  
You must enter the appropriate remote control code  
first (page 58).  
Note  
• Use only ucables for uconnections. ucables are  
supplied with Onkyo components.  
Remote Control  
• Some components have two ujacks. You can connect  
either one to the AV receiver. The other jack is for  
connecting additional u-capable components.  
• Connect only Onkyo components to ujacks. Connecting  
other manufacturer’s components may cause a  
malfunction.  
• Some components may not support all ufunctions. Refer  
to the manuals supplied with your Onkyo components.  
• While Zone 2 is on, the System On/Auto Power On and  
Direct Change ufunctions do not work.  
En-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Turning On & Basic Operations  
the same circuit. If this is a problem, plug the AV receiver  
into a different branch circuit.  
Firmware Update Notification  
• Do not use a power cord other than the one supplied with  
the AV receiver. The supplied power cord is designed  
exclusively for use with the AV receiver and should not be  
used with any other equipment.  
• Never disconnect the power cord from the AV receiver  
while the other end is still plugged into a wall outlet. Doing  
so may cause an electric shock. Always disconnect the  
power cord from the wall outlet first, and then the AV  
receiver.  
When a new version of the firmware is available, the  
notification window “Update New F/W” pops up. This  
notification only appears when the AV receiver is  
connected to the Internet (page 15). To perform  
the firmware update, follow the instructions on  
screen.  
Turning On & Basic  
Operations  
Use q/wand ENTER on the AV receiver or remote  
controller to select one of the options.  
`Update Now:  
Turning On  
Starts the firmware update.  
Refer to “Firmware Update” (page 68).  
Turning On/Off the AV  
Receiver  
Press 8ON/STANDBY on the front panel.  
`Remind me Later:  
1
or  
The update notification will pop up again the  
next time you turn the AV receiver on.  
`Never Remind me:  
Press RECEIVER followed by 8RECEIVER on  
the remote controller.  
Connecting the Power Cord  
Disables the automatic update notification.  
The AV receiver comes on and its display lights.  
Tip  
(Taiwanese models)  
1
• The update notification window can be enabled or disabled  
in “Update Notice” (page 55).  
Turning Off  
Connect the supplied power cord to the AV  
receiver’s AC INLET.  
Press 8ON/STANDBY on the front panel.  
1
About the HYBRID STANDBY indicator  
or  
Press RECEIVER followed by 8RECEIVER on  
the remote controller.  
By way of optimized circuitry, this function reduces  
power consumption when the AV receiver is in  
standby mode. The HYBRID STANDBY indicator will  
light in either of the following conditions:  
–“HDMI Through” is enabled and Zones are turned  
off (the HDMI indicator is off).  
The AV receiver will enter standby mode. To  
prevent any loud surprises when you turn on the  
AV receiver, always turn down the volume before  
you turn it off.  
To AC wall outlet  
–“Network Standby” is enabled and Zones are  
turned off (the NET indicator is off).  
Tip  
Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet.  
2
• The HYBRID STANDBY indicator may light depending on  
the status of settings.  
• For details on power management settings, see “Auto  
Standby” (page 52).  
Note  
• Before connecting the power cord, connect all of your  
speakers and AV components.  
• Turning on the AV receiver may cause a momentary power  
surge that might interfere with other electrical equipment on  
En-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
Turning On & Basic Operations  
Measurement procedure  
Note  
Using the Automatic Speaker Setup  
• Make the room as quiet as possible. Background noise and  
Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) can disrupt the room  
measurements. Close windows, televisions, radios, air  
conditioners, fluorescent lights, home appliances, light  
dimmers, or other devices. Turn off the cell phone (even if  
it is not in use) or place it away from all audio electronics.  
• The microphone picks up test tones played through each  
speaker as Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and  
Speaker Setup runs.  
To create a listening environment in your home  
theater that all listeners will enjoy, Audyssey MultEQ  
takes measurements at up to six positions within the  
listening area. Position the microphone at ear height  
of a seated listener with the microphone tip pointed  
directly at the ceiling using a tripod. Do not hold the  
microphone in your hand during measurements as  
this will produce inaccurate results.  
With the supplied calibrated microphone,  
Audyssey MultEQ automatically determines the  
number of speakers connected, their size for  
purposes of bass management, optimum crossover  
frequencies to the subwoofer (if present), and  
distances from the primary listening position.  
®
Audyssey MultEQ then removes the distortion caused  
by room acoustics by capturing room acoustical  
problems over the listening area in both the frequency  
and time domain. The result is clear, well-balanced  
sound for everyone. Audyssey MultEQ can be used  
• Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup  
cannot be performed while a pair of headphones is  
connected.  
First measurement position  
Also referred to as the Main Listening Position, this  
refers to the most central position where one would  
normally sit within the listening environment.  
Audyssey MultEQ uses the measurements from this  
position to calculate speaker distance, level, and the  
optimum crossover value for the subwoofer.  
®
with Audyssey Dynamic EQ and  
®
Audyssey Dynamic Volume (pages 49, 50).  
Before using this function, connect and position all of  
your speakers.  
Audyssey MultEQ offers two ways of measuring: the  
Audyssey Quick Start” and “Audyssey MultEQ  
Full Calibration”.  
• “Audyssey Quick Start” uses the measurement  
from one position to perform the speaker setting  
only.  
Second-sixth measurement positions  
These are the other listening positions (i.e., the  
places where the other listeners will sit). You can  
measure up to six positions.  
• “Audyssey MultEQ Full Calibration” uses the  
measurement from six positions to correct room  
response in addition to the speaker setting.  
The more positions are used in measuring, the better  
the listening environment will become. We  
recommend using a measurement from six positions  
to create the best listening environment.  
The Quick Start takes 2 minutes and Full Calibration  
takes about 15 minutes.  
TV  
d e f  
c a b  
: Listening area  
a to f: Listening position  
Total measurement time varies depending on the  
number of speakers.  
En-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Turning On & Basic Operations  
Turn on the AV receiver and the connected TV.  
On the TV, select the input to which the AV  
receiver is connected.  
Adjust the subwoofer volume level to 75 dB,  
and then press ENTER.  
Test tones are played through the subwoofer.  
Use the volume control on the subwoofer.  
Use q/wto select an option, and then press  
1
2
4
9
ENTER.  
Audyssey  
MultEQ: Auto Setup  
Set the speaker setup microphone at the Main  
Listening Position a, and connect it to the  
SETUP MIC jack.  
<- Review Speaker Configuration ->  
Subwoofer  
Front  
:
:
:
:
:
Yes  
Note  
Small  
Small  
Small  
100Hz  
Center  
• If your subwoofer does not have a volume control,  
disregard the displayed level and press ENTER to  
proceed to the next step.  
Surround  
Crossover  
SETUP MIC jack  
• If you set the subwoofer’s volume control to its  
maximum and the level displayed is lower than 75 dB,  
leave the subwoofer’s volume control at its maximum  
and press ENTER to proceed to the next step.  
Save  
Cancel  
The options are:  
`Save:  
Use q/wto select “Audyssey Quick Start” or  
“Audyssey MultEQ Full Calibration”, and then  
press ENTER.  
5
6
Save the calculated settings and exit  
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and  
Speaker Setup.  
Speaker setup microphone  
Press ENTER.  
`Cancel:  
®
Cancel Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction  
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and  
The speaker setting menu appears.  
and Speaker Setup.  
Speaker Setup starts.  
Note  
Test tones are played through each speaker as  
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker  
Setup runs. This process takes a few minutes.  
Please refrain from talking during  
measurements and do not stand between  
speakers and the microphone.  
Do not disconnect the speaker setup microphone  
during Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and  
Speaker Setup, unless you want to cancel the  
setup.  
Tip  
• The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is  
connected to HDMI OUT. If your TV is connected to  
other video outputs, use the AV receiver’s display  
when changing settings.  
• You can view the calculated settings for the speaker  
configuration, speaker distances, and speaker levels  
by using e/r.  
When you’ve finished making the settings,  
press ENTER.  
Use q/wto select a target, and use e/rto  
change the setting.  
10  
3
After the results of Audyssey MultEQ have been  
saved, the menu will display the “Audyssey”  
(page 49), “Dynamic EQ” (page 49),  
“Dynamic Volume” (page 50) settings.  
Audyssey  
Yes  
MultEQ: Auto Setup  
Subwoofer  
If you select “Audyssey Quick Start”, you will go  
to step 9.  
Perform the “4. Sp Config (Speaker  
Configuration)” according to your speaker  
configuration:  
Note  
• When “Audyssey Quick Start” has been used for  
measurement, “Audyssey” cannot be selected.  
• These settings are applied to all input selectors.  
Place the speaker setup microphone at the  
next position, and then press ENTER.  
Audyssey MultEQ performs more  
7
8
Subwoofer (page 46)  
If you use a powered subwoofer(s), go to step 4.  
If not, go to step 5.  
Press ENTER.  
measurements. This takes a few minutes.  
11  
12  
When prompted, repeat step 7.  
Disconnect the speaker setup microphone.  
En-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Turning On & Basic Operations  
Error Messages  
Note  
The setup of the speaker can be done manually  
(page 46).  
The setup of the volume level of each speaker also  
can be done manually (pages 47, 48).  
• You can cancel Audyssey MultEQ® Room Correction and  
Speaker Setup at any point in this procedure simply by  
disconnecting the setup microphone.  
• Do not connect or disconnect any speakers during  
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup.  
• If the AV receiver is muted, it will be unmuted automatically  
when Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker  
Setup starts.  
• Changes to the room after Audyssey MultEQ Room  
Correction and Speaker Setup requires you run  
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup  
again, as room EQ characteristics may have changed.  
While Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and  
Speaker Setup is in progress, one of the error  
messages below may appear.  
Using a Powered Subwoofer  
Audyssey  
MultEQ: Auto Setup  
If you’re using a powered subwoofer and it outputs  
very low-frequency sound at a low volume level, it  
may not be detected by Audyssey MultEQ Room  
Correction and Speaker Setup.  
Ambient noise is too high.  
Error message  
Retry  
Cancel  
If the “Subwoofer” appears on the “Review Speaker  
Configuration” screen as “No”, increase the  
subwoofer’s volume to the half-way point, set it to its  
highest crossover frequency, and then try running  
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker  
Setup again. Note that if the volume is set too high  
and the sound distorts, detection issues may occur,  
so use an appropriate volume level. If the subwoofer  
has a low-pass filter switch, set it to Off or Direct.  
Refer to your subwoofer’s instruction manual for  
details.  
The options are:  
`Retry:  
Try again.  
`Cancel:  
Cancel Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and  
Speaker Setup.  
• Ambient noise is too high.  
The background noise is too loud. Remove the  
source of the noise and try again.  
• Speaker Matching Error!  
The number of speakers detected was different  
from that of the first measurement. Check the  
speaker connection.  
• Writing Error!  
This message appears if saving fails. Try saving  
again. If this message appears after 2 or 3  
attempts, contact your Onkyo dealer.  
• Speaker Detect Error  
This message appears if a speaker is not detected.  
No” means that no speaker was detected.  
Tip  
• See “Speaker Configuration” for appropriate settings  
(page 11).  
En-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Playback  
* For the CEC compatible TV and the AV components  
connected with HDMI connections, switching the input  
is automatically performed. Switch the input manually  
for other AV components.  
1
2
4
Select the desired listening mode.  
You can enjoy various types of listening mode.  
The listening mode is switched by pressing  
Listening mode button on the AV receiver or the  
remote controller.  
3
4
Playback  
Adjust the volume.  
You can enjoy the surround sound.  
3
Tip  
Playback  
When listening to an HDMI component through the AV  
receiver, set the HDMI component so that its video can be  
seen on the TV screen (on the TV, select the input of the  
HDMI component connected to the AV receiver). If the TV  
power is off or the TV is set to another input source, this  
may result in no sound from the AV receiver or the sound  
may be cut off.  
1
2
3
4
This section describes the basic operation such as  
playback, listening mode, and other useful functions.  
Reading this manual from the beginning to this  
section helps you to understand the basic  
connection/setup/operation.  
See also:  
• “Playing an iPod/iPhone via USB” (page 26)  
• “Playing a USB Device” (page 27)  
• “Listening to TuneIn” (page 27)  
• “Registering Other Internet Radio” (page 28)  
• “Playing Music Files on a Server (DLNA)”  
(page 29)  
• “Playing Music Files on a Shared Folder”  
(page 30)  
• “Remote Playback” (page 31)  
• “Listening to AM/FM Radio” (page 32)  
• “Playing Audio and Video from Separate Sources”  
(page 34)  
Turn on the AV receiver, the TV and the AV  
components.  
1
2
controller, press the RECEIVER button first.  
Select the input on the AV receiver to play the  
AV components.  
Press the input selector button to which the AV  
Press the TV/CD button to play the audio of the  
TV. Switching the input on the TV is also  
required. Select the input to which the AV  
receiver is connected by using the TV remote  
• “Controlling Other Components” (page 57)  
• “Using the Onkyo Dock” (page 61)  
En-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Playback  
TOP MENU  
This button displays the top menu for each media or  
service.  
a
b
m
n
o
6
Controlling Contents of USB or  
Network Devices  
This button selects the next song.  
2
(page 26)  
q/wand ENTER  
This button stops playback.  
These buttons navigate through the menus.  
MODE  
Press USB or NET first.  
e/r  
You can switch between Standard Mode and Extended  
Mode (iPod/iPhone).  
This button cycles through pages.  
This button performs random playback.  
q
PLAYLIST e/r  
In Standard Mode (iPod/iPhone), this button selects  
playlists.  
REPEAT  
c
d
Press this button repeatedly to cycle through the repeat  
modes.  
1
This button starts playback.  
7
This button selects the beginning of the current song.  
Pressing this button twice selects the previous song.  
h
i
• See “Controlling Other Components” about the operation of  
other components (page 57).  
e
f
g
5
Note  
This button fast-reverses the current song.  
• The buttons you can use will differ depending on the  
devices and media used for playback.  
3
a
b
j
This button pauses playback.  
SEARCH  
You can toggle between the playback screen and the  
list screen during playback.  
k
l
m
n
c
e
f
g
DISPLAY  
h
This button switches between song information during  
playback.  
Press this button while the list screen is displayed to  
return to the playback screen.  
o
p
q
ALBUM +/–  
In Standard Mode (iPod/iPhone), this button selects  
albums.  
i
j
MENU  
This button displays the menu of Internet radio  
services.  
RETURN  
This button returns to the previous menu.  
k
l
4
This button fast-forwards the current song.  
En-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Playback  
• When you disconnect the iPod/iPhone, the AV  
Understanding Icons on the Display  
Playing an iPod/iPhone via USB  
receiver remembers the current mode. This means  
that if you disconnect when in Extended Mode, the AV  
receiver will start in Extended Mode the next time you  
connect the iPod/iPhone.  
This section describes icons that appear on the AV  
receiver’s display during media playback.  
Tip  
• The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is  
connected to the HDMI OUT.  
Icon  
Description  
• You can also use the q/w, ENTER and TUNING  
MODE buttons on the front panel. TUNING MODE  
allows you to switch modes.  
Folder  
This section explains how to play music files on the  
iPod/iPhone.  
Compatible iPod/iPhone models  
• When connecting your iPod/iPhone with a USB cable,  
we recommend you use an official USB cable from  
Apple Inc.  
Track  
Made for:  
Playback  
iPod touch (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th generation),  
iPod classic, iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th and  
7th generation), iPhone 5, iPhone 4S, iPhone 4,  
iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone  
Use q/wto select a music file, and press  
4
Pause  
ENTER or 1to start playback.  
Fast Forward  
Fast Reverse  
Artist  
Note  
Press USB repeatedly to select the  
“USB(Front)” input.  
• While the message “Connecting...” appears on the AV  
receiver’s display, do not disconnect the USB cable  
supplied with your iPod/iPhone or the USB device from the  
USB port.  
1
Tip  
• The same operation can be done by selecting “USB”  
in the Home menu.  
• If you connect an iPod or iPhone to the USB port, no sound  
will be output from the headphones jack.  
Album  
Connect the USB cable that comes with the  
iPod/iPhone to the USB port on the front of the  
AV receiver.  
2
Extended Mode Control  
Repeat One Track  
Repeat Folder (USB Device)  
Repeat  
The content information is displayed (lists are  
displayed), and you can control the content while  
looking at the screen.  
Top screen list:  
Playlists, Artists, Albums, Genres, Songs,  
Composers, Shuffle Songs, Now Playing.  
While reading the contents of your iPod/iPhone,  
the message “Connecting...” appears on the AV  
receiver’s display.  
A list of your iPod/iPhone model’s contents  
appears (Extended Mode).  
Shuffle  
The USB indicator lights. It will flash if the AV  
receiver cannot read the iPod/iPhone.  
Standard Mode Control  
Shuffle Album (iPod/iPhone)  
Use q/wto select a folder, and then press  
3
The content information is not displayed, but can be  
operated using the iPod/iPhone or the remote  
controller.  
ENTER to open it.  
Tip  
• If you want to operate using the iPod/iPhone or the  
remote controller, press MODE to switch to Standard  
mode.  
En-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Playback  
Either of the following menus can be selected by  
pressing the MENU button on the remote controller or  
pressing ENTER button to select “Go to Menu”.  
`Add to My Presets  
In this menu, stations or programs can be stored  
in “My Presets”.  
`Remove from My Presets  
Playing a USB Device  
Listening to TuneIn  
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home  
network (page 15).  
Tip  
• The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is  
connected to the HDMI OUT.  
Tip  
• The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is  
connected to the HDMI OUT.  
This section explains how to play music files from a  
USB device (e.g., USB flash drives and MP3 players).  
See also:  
In this menu, stations or programs stored in “My  
Presets” can be deleted.  
`Report a problem  
TuneIn is a new radio service which offers the music,  
sports and news all over the world.  
• “Network/USB Features” (page 72)  
Over 70,000 radio stations and 2 million on-demand  
programs are registered, and you can easily enjoy  
them by selecting stations or programs of your  
choice. TuneIn is preprogrammed on the AV receiver.  
This menu is used to report problems on TuneIn  
service or resolve the problems in a wizard style.  
`View Schedule  
In this menu, program listings of stations or  
programs can be displayed.  
`Clear recents  
In this menu, all the stations and programs  
stored in “Recents” can be deleted.  
`Add to My Favorites  
Press USB repeatedly to select the  
“USB(Front)” or “USB(Rear)” input.  
1
Plug your USB device into the AV receiver’s  
USB port.  
The USB indicator lights. It will flash if the AV  
receiver cannot read the USB device.  
2
Press NET.  
1
The “NET” screen appears, and the NET indicator  
lights. If it flashes, verify that the Ethernet cable is  
firmly connected to the AV receiver.  
Press ENTER.  
3
A list of the device’s contents appears. To open a  
folder, use q/wto select it, and then press  
ENTER.  
In this menu, stations or programs can be stored  
in “My Favorites”.  
Tip  
• The same operation can be done by selecting  
Network Service” in the Home menu.  
Setting an TuneIn account  
Use q/wto select a music file, and press  
4
Use q/wto select “TuneIn” and then press  
2
ENTER or 1to start playback.  
ENTER.  
To create a user account for TuneIn, open a browser  
®
window such as Internet Explorer , and connect to  
Use q/wto select a station or a program, and  
3
Note  
tunein.com website. With a TuneIn account, you can  
quickly search and browse for stations and programs  
at tunein.com website and save as your favorites  
which will automatically appear in your AV receiver  
My Presets account. If you have a TuneIn account,  
select “Login” and then “I have a TuneIn account”  
on the top list. Enter your user name and password to  
login.  
then press ENTER.  
• While the message “Connecting...” appears on the AV  
receiver’s display, do not disconnect the USB cable  
supplied with your iPod/iPhone or the USB device from the  
USB port.  
Playback starts.  
TuneIn  
News  
Station name  
Sports talk  
Track  
Station  
Info  
:
:
:
0
:
11  
Tip  
Go to Menu  
• Select “Login with a registration code”, and associate a  
device from my page on TuneIn website by using a  
registration code displayed on the screen. This allows you  
to login without entering a user name and a password.  
En-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Playback  
Adding TuneIn radio stations or programs to  
My Favorites/My Presets  
Click “Save” to save the Internet radio station.  
The Internet radio station is then added to “My  
Favorites”. To play the registered station, press  
NET, and then select “My Favorites” on the  
NET” screen. A list of registered Internet radio  
stations appears. Select the one that you saved  
and press ENTER.  
Registering Other Internet Radio  
5
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home  
network (page 15).  
There are two ways you can register specific Internet  
radio stations (programs) from the TuneIn.  
Tip  
• Adding to My Favorites  
• The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is  
connected to the HDMI OUT.  
The selected program will be added to “My  
Favorites” on the “NET” screen, which appears when  
pressing NET.  
1. Select radio stations or programs, and press  
MENU button on the remote controller.  
Internet radio URLs in the following formats are  
supported: PLS, M3U, and podcast (RSS). However,  
depending on the type of data or audio format used  
by the Internet radio station, you may not be able to  
listen to some stations.  
To listen to other Internet radio stations, you must  
register your station in “My Favorites” of the “NET”  
screen, as described below.  
Tip  
• If you want to add a new station directly from “My  
Favorites”, select an empty slot in the list and press MENU.  
Then, select “Create New Station” and press ENTER.  
Pressing ENTER again will display the keyboard screen.  
Use that keyboard to enter the station’s name and URL  
respectively, and then press ENTER.  
2. Use q/wto select “Add to My Favorites”, and  
press ENTER.  
3. Use q/w/e/rto select “OK”, and press ENTER.  
Tip  
• If you want to delete a station saved in “My Favorites”,  
press MENU with the station selected or while the station is  
playing. Then, use q/wto select “Delete from My  
Favorites” and press ENTER. You can also delete stations  
from the Web Setup.  
• You can rename the stations saved in “My Favorites”  
Note  
(page 28).  
• Services available may vary depending on the region. See  
the separate instructions for more information.  
• Certain network service or contents available through this  
device may not be accessible in case the service provider  
terminates its service.  
• Adding TuneIn radio stations or programs to My  
Presets  
Select "TuneIn", and press ENTER button to display  
a folder of “My Presets” on the screen that displays  
Category/Area, etc. Store your favorite stations or  
programs in this folder.  
• If you want to rename a station, select the desired station  
and press MENU. Then, use q/wto select “Rename this  
station” and press ENTER.  
• You can save up to 40 Internet radio stations.  
Select “Network Setup” on the Setup menu to  
verify your IP address (page 54).  
1
1. Select radio stations or programs, and press  
MENU button on the remote controller.  
Take a note of the IP address.  
On your computer, start your web browser.  
2. Use q/wto select “Add to My Presets”, and  
2
3
press ENTER.  
Enter the AV receiver’s IP address in the  
browser’s Internet address (URL) field.  
Tip  
• If no radio stations or programs are stored in “My Presets”,  
®
If you are using Internet Explorer , you can also  
My Presets” folder will not be displayed.  
enter the URL by selecting “Open...” on the “File”  
menu.  
Information on the AV receiver is then shown on  
your Internet browser (Web Setup).  
Click on the “My Favorites” tab, and enter the  
Internet radio station’s name and URL.  
4
En-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Playback  
Press NET.  
Playing Music Files on a Server (DLNA)  
Tip  
2
The “NET” screen appears. The NET indicator  
lights. If it flashes, confirm the network  
connection.  
• Windows Media Player 11 can be downloaded for free  
from the Microsoft web site.  
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home  
network (page 15).  
Tip  
Tip  
Windows Media Player 12 Setup  
• The same operation can be done by selecting  
Network Service” in the Home menu.  
This section explains how to configure Windows  
Media Player 12 so that the AV receiver can play the  
music files stored on your personal computer.  
• The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is  
connected to the HDMI OUT.  
Use q/wto select “DLNA”, and press ENTER.  
This section explains how to play music files on a  
computer or media server through the AV receiver  
(Server Playback).  
4
Start Windows Media Player 12.  
Use q/wto select a server, and then press  
1
2
ENTER.  
On the “Stream” menu, select “Turn on media  
streaming”.  
The menu is displayed according to the server  
functions.  
Windows Media Player Setup  
A dialog box appears.  
Windows Media Player 11 Setup  
Note  
Tip  
This section explains how to configure Windows  
Media Player 11 so that the AV receiver can play the  
music files stored on your computer.  
• The search function does not work with media servers  
which do not support this function.  
• Photos and movies stored on a media server cannot  
be accessed from the AV receiver.  
• Depending on the sharing settings in the media server,  
the AV receiver may not able to access the content.  
See the instruction manual of the media server.  
• If the media streaming is already activated, clicking on  
“More streaming options...” in the “Stream” menu will  
display a list of the playback devices connected to the  
network. You can skip step 3.  
Start Windows Media Player 11.  
1
2
Move your cursor and click on “Turn on media  
streaming”.  
3
On the “Library” menu, select “Media  
Sharing”.  
A list of media server appears. Wording may vary  
slightly depending on the network location.  
Use q/wto select an item, and then press  
5
The “Media Sharing” dialog box appears.  
ENTER or 1to start playback.  
Select the “Share my media” check box, and  
then click “OK”.  
On the “Media streaming options”, select the  
AV receiver and confirm that it is set to  
“Allowed”.  
3
4
DLNA  
A list of the supported devices appears.  
Track name  
Artist name  
Album name  
Track  
Artist Name  
Album Name  
:
:
:
Select the AV receiver in the list, and then  
click “Allow”.  
The corresponding icon will be checked.  
Click “OK” to close the dialog box.  
This completes the Windows Media Player 12  
configuration.  
4
5
0
:
11  
/
2
:
00  
You can now play the music files in your  
Windows Media Player 12 library.  
Click “OK” to close the dialog box.  
This completes the Windows Media Player 11  
configuration.  
You can now play the music files in your  
Windows Media Player 11 library through the AV  
receiver.  
5
Note  
Playing music files on a server (DLNA)  
• Depending on the media server, 5/4/3may not  
work.  
Start your computer or media server.  
• If the message “No Item.” appears, this means that no  
information can be retrieved from the server. In this  
case, check your server, network, and AV receiver  
connections.  
1
En-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Playback  
Under “Network File and Folder Sharing”,  
select “Share”.  
When asked for a user name and password,  
enter the necessary login information.  
Playing Music Files on a Shared Folder  
5
6
5
This section explains how to play music files on a  
computer or NAS (Network Attached Storage)  
through the AV receiver.  
Select “Everyone” from the pull-down menu,  
click “Add”, and then click “Share”.  
Tip  
• The login information will be remembered for the next  
time you log in.  
• The login information is that of the user account set  
when creating a shared folder.  
Tip  
Windows 8/Windows 7 Setup  
• With this setting, everyone is allowed to access the  
folder. If you want to assign a user name and  
password to the folder, make the corresponding  
settings for “Permissions” in “Advanced Sharing” of the  
“Sharing” tab.  
Use q/wto select a music file and then press  
ENTER or 1.  
Setting the sharing options  
Select “Choose homegroup and sharing  
options” on the Control Panel.  
The playback of the selected file starts.  
1
• Verify that “Workgroup” is properly set.  
Note  
Tip  
• When using NAS (Network Attached Storage), refer to  
the instruction manual provided with your NAS unit.  
• If this option is not available, verify that “View by:” is set  
to “Category”.  
Select “Change advanced sharing settings”.  
Playing music files on a shared folder  
2
3
In order to enjoy Home Media, you must first create a  
shared folder on your computer.  
Under “Home or Work”, verify that the  
following items are checked:  
“Turn on network discovery”, “Turn on file and  
printer sharing”, “Turn on sharing so anyone with  
network access can read and write files in the  
Public folders”, and “Turn off password protected  
sharing”.  
Press NET.  
1
The network service screen appears. The NET  
indicator lights. If it flashes, confirm the network  
connection.  
Tip  
Select “Save changes” and click “OK” on the  
confirmation screen.  
4
• The same operation can be done by selecting  
Network Service” in the Home menu.  
Creating a shared folder  
Use q/wto select “Home Media”, and press  
2
ENTER.  
Right-click the folder that you want to share.  
1
2
3
Use q/wto select a server, and then press  
3
Select “Properties”.  
ENTER.  
Tip  
On the “Sharing” tab, select “Advanced  
Sharing”.  
• The server name of your computer can be viewed on  
the computer properties screen.  
Check the check box of “Share this folder”  
and then click “OK”.  
4
Use q/wto select the desired shared folder  
4
and then press ENTER.  
En-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Playback  
Click “OK” to close the dialog box.  
This completes the Windows Media Player 12  
configuration.  
You can now play the music files in your  
Windows Media Player 12 library.  
Adjusting the Volume.  
Remote Playback  
5
5
You can adjust the volume by adjusting the  
volume bar in the “Remote playback” window.  
The default maximum volume level is 64. If you  
wish to change this, enter the value from the Web  
Setup in your browser. Refer to step 3 of  
“Registering Other Internet Radio” for details  
(page 28).  
The volume value of the remote window and the  
volume value of the AV receiver may not always  
match.  
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home  
network (page 15).  
Tip  
• The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is  
connected to the HDMI OUT.  
Tip  
• On the “Stream” menu, confirm that “Allow remote  
control of my Player...” is checked.  
Remote playback is supported by Windows Media  
Player 12.  
Remote Playback means you can play the music files  
stored on a media server or personal computer with  
the AV receiver by operating the controller device in  
the home network.  
Using Remote Playback  
Adjustments you make to the volume in the AV  
receiver will not be reflected in the “Remote  
playback” window.  
Turn on the AV receiver.  
1
2
Start Windows Media Player 12.  
To enable remote playback, you must first  
configure Windows Media Player 12.  
Windows Media Player 12 Setup  
Note  
This section explains how to configure Windows  
Media Player 12 so that the AV receiver can play the  
music files stored on your personal computer.  
• Remote playback cannot be used in any of the following  
cases:  
Network services are being used.  
Contents are being played from a USB device or  
iPod/iPhone.  
On Windows Media Player 12, right-click on a  
music file.  
The right-click menu appears.  
3
Start Windows Media Player 12.  
1
2
Tip  
• For selecting another media server, select the desired  
media server from the “Other Libraries” menu on  
Windows Media Player 12.  
On the “Stream” menu, select “Turn on media  
streaming”.  
A dialog box appears.  
Select the AV receiver in “Remote playback”.  
4
Tip  
The “Play to” window appears and playback on  
the AV receiver starts. Operations during remote  
playback can be made from the “Play to” window  
of Windows 8/Windows 7 on your personal  
computer.  
• If the media streaming is already activated, clicking on  
“More streaming options...” in the “Stream” menu will  
display a list of the playback devices connected to the  
network. You can skip step 3.  
Move your cursor and click on “Turn on media  
streaming”.  
A list of media server appears. Wording may vary  
slightly depending on the network location.  
3
A playback screen will be displayed on the  
connected TV.  
Tip  
• If the operating system of your personal computer is  
Windows 8, click “Play to” and select the AV receiver.  
On the “Media streaming options”, select the  
AV receiver and confirm that it is set to  
“Allowed”.  
4
En-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Playback  
Tuning into stations by frequency  
You can tune into AM and FM stations directly by  
entering the appropriate frequency.  
Press TUNING q/w.  
Listening to AM/FM Radio  
2
Searching stops when a station is found.  
This section describes the procedure of using the  
buttons on the front panel, unless otherwise specified.  
When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator  
lights. When tuned into a stereo FM station, the  
FM STEREO indicator lights as shown.  
On the remote controller, press AM or FM to  
select “AM” or “FM”, followed by D.TUN.  
1
Using the Tuner  
With the built-in tuner you can enjoy AM and FM radio  
stations. You can store your favorite stations as  
presets for quick selection.  
TUNED  
AUTO  
You can also change the frequency steps  
(page 52).  
(Actual display depends on the country.)  
Within 8 seconds, use the number buttons to  
2
FM STEREO  
enter the frequency of the radio station.  
For example, to tune to 87.5 (FM), press 8, 7, 5  
or 8, 7, 5, 0.  
If you have entered the wrong number, you can  
retry after 8 seconds.  
Press AM or FM to select either “AM” or “FM”.  
In this example, FM has been selected.  
1
Tip  
• Tuning into weak FM stereo stations  
If the signal from a stereo FM station is weak, it may  
be impossible to get good reception. In this case,  
switch to manual tuning mode and listen to the station  
in mono.  
Band  
Frequency  
Presetting AM/FM Stations  
(Actual display depends on the country.)  
Tuning into Radio Stations  
Auto tuning mode  
You can store a combination of up to 40 of your  
favorite AM/FM radio stations as presets.  
Manual tuning mode  
In manual tuning mode, FM stations will be in mono.  
Tune into the AM/FM station that you want to  
store as a preset.  
1
Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO  
indicator goes off on the AV receiver’s  
display.  
1
See the previous section.  
Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO  
1
Press MEMORY.  
The preset number flashes.  
indicator lights on the AV receiver’s display.  
2
Press and hold TUNING q/w.  
2
The frequency stops changing when you release  
the button.  
Press the buttons repeatedly to change the  
frequency one step at a time.  
(Actual display depends on the country.)  
While the preset number is flashing (about 8  
3
seconds), use PRESET e/rto select a preset  
from 1 through 40.  
En-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Playback  
Using RDS (excluding North American and  
Taiwanese models)  
Press MEMORY again to store the station or  
channel.  
The station or channel is stored and the preset  
number stops flashing.  
Repeat this procedure for all of your favorite  
AM/FM radio stations.  
Note  
4
• RDS works only in areas where RDS broadcasts are  
available.  
When tuned into an RDS station, the RDS indicator  
lights.  
When the station is broadcasting text information, the  
text can be displayed.  
• In some cases, the text characters displayed on the AV  
receiver may not be identical to those broadcast by the  
radio station. Also, unexpected characters may be  
displayed when unsupported characters are received. This  
is not a malfunction.  
What is RDS?  
If the signal from an RDS station is weak, RDS data may be  
displayed intermittently or not at all.  
RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a method of  
transmitting data in FM radio signals. It was developed  
by the European Broadcasting Union (EBU) and is  
available in most European countries. Many FM  
stations use it these days. In addition to displaying text  
information, RDS can also help you find radio stations  
by type (e.g., news, sport, rock, etc.).  
Selecting Presets  
Displaying Radio Text (RT)  
To select a preset, use PRESET e/ron the AV  
1
receiver, or the remote controller’s CH +/–.  
Tip  
Press RT/PTY/TP once.  
The RT information scrolls across the AV  
receiver’s display.  
1
• You can also use the remote controller’s number  
buttons to select a preset directly.  
Note  
The AV receiver supports four types of RDS  
information:  
PS (Program Service)  
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting PS  
information, the station’s name will be displayed.  
Pressing DISPLAY will display the frequency for 3  
seconds.  
• The message “Waiting” may appear while the AV  
receiver waits for the RT information.  
• If the message “No Text Data” appears, no RT  
information is available.  
Deleting Presets  
Select the preset that you want to delete.  
See the previous section.  
1
Finding Stations by Type (PTY)  
While holding down MEMORY, press TUNING  
MODE.  
2
RT (Radio Text)  
You can search for radio stations by type.  
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting  
text information, the text will be shown on the AV  
receiver’s display.  
PTY (Program Type)  
This allows you to search for RDS radio stations by  
type.  
TP (Traffic Program)  
This allows you to search for RDS radio stations that  
broadcast traffic information (page 34).  
The preset is deleted and its number disappears  
from the AV receiver’s display.  
Press RT/PTY/TP twice.  
The current program type appears on the AV  
receiver’s display.  
1
Use PRESET e/rto select the type of  
2
program you want.  
See the table shown later in this chapter.  
To start the search, press ENTER.  
3
The AV receiver searches until it finds a station of  
the type you specified, at which point it stops  
briefly before continuing with the search.  
En-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Playback  
RDS program types (PTY)  
When a station you want to listen to is found,  
press ENTER.  
If no stations are found, the message “Not  
Found” appears.  
Playing Audio and Video from Separate  
Sources  
4
Type  
Display  
None  
None  
You can listen to the audio of one input source while  
watching the video of another. This function takes  
advantage of the fact that when an audio-only input  
source (TV/CD, AM, FM) is selected, the video input  
source remains unchanged. The following procedure  
shows how to listen to a CD player’s audio source  
connected to TV/CD IN while watching a Blu-ray  
Disc/DVD player’s video source connected to  
BD/DVD.  
News reports  
Current affairs  
Information  
Sport  
News  
Affairs  
Info  
Listening to Traffic News (TP)  
Sport  
Education  
Educate  
Drama  
Culture  
Science  
Varied  
Pop M  
Rock M  
Easy M  
Light M  
Classics  
Other M  
Weather  
Finance  
Children  
Social  
You can search for stations that broadcast traffic  
news.  
Drama  
Culture  
Science and technology  
Varied  
Press RT/PTY/TP three times.  
1
If the current radio station is broadcasting TP  
(Traffic Program), “[TP]” will appear on the AV  
receiver’s display. If “TP” without square brackets  
appears, this means that the station is not  
broadcasting TP.  
Tip  
Pop music  
Rock music  
Middle of the road music  
Light classics  
Serious classics  
Other music  
Weather  
To use an input selector as audio-exclusive, you must  
assign all video inputs to “- - - - -” ( pages 45 to 46).  
Press BD/DVD.  
1
2
To locate a station that is broadcasting TP,  
press ENTER.  
The AV receiver searches until it finds a station  
that’s broadcasting TP.  
If no stations are found, the message “Not  
Found” appears.  
2
Press TV/CD.  
The audio output changes to the CD source, but  
the video of previously-selected BD/DVD is  
retained.  
Finance  
Children’s programmes  
Social affairs  
Religion  
Start playback on your Blu-Ray Disc/DVD and  
CD players.  
3
Religion  
Phone In  
Travel  
You can now enjoy watching your Blu-ray  
Disc/DVD with the sound of your CD player.  
Phone in  
Travel  
Leisure  
Leisure  
Jazz  
Jazz music  
Country music  
National music  
Oldies music  
Folk music  
Documentary  
Alarm test  
Country  
Nation M  
Oldies  
Folk M  
Document  
TEST  
Alarm  
Alarm!  
En-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Playback  
PURE AUDIO button and indicator  
(European, Australian and Asian models)  
(North American and Taiwanese models)  
Using the Listening Modes  
About Listening Modes  
This button selects the Pure Audio listening mode.  
When this mode is selected, the AV receiver’s display  
and analog video circuitry are turned off. Only video  
signals input through HDMI input can be output from  
the HDMI output. The indicator lights when this mode  
is selected. Pressing this button again will select the  
previous listening mode.  
The AV receiver’s listening modes can transform your  
listening room into a movie theater or concert hall,  
with high fidelity and stunning surround sound.  
Selecting Listening Modes  
Listening Mode Buttons  
Press RECEIVER first.  
MOVIE/TV, MUSIC, GAME  
Note  
• The Dolby Digital and DTS listening modes can only be  
selected if your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player is connected to the  
AV receiver with a digital audio connection (coaxial, optical,  
or HDMI).  
(European, Australian and Asian models)  
The listening modes you can select depends on the format  
of the input signal. To check the format, see “Displaying  
Source Information” (page 39).  
• While a pair of headphones is connected, you can select  
the following listening modes: Pure Audio (European,  
Australian and Asian models), Mono, Direct, and Stereo.  
PURE AUDIO  
MOVIE/TV, MUSIC, GAME  
MOVIE/TV button  
This button selects the listening modes intended for  
use with movies and TV.  
MUSIC button  
This button selects the listening modes intended for  
use with music.  
MUSIC  
GAME button  
GAME  
MOVIE/TV  
STEREO  
This button selects the listening modes intended for  
use with video games.  
STEREO button  
This button selects the Stereo listening mode and All  
Channel Stereo listening mode.  
En-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Playback  
Input Source  
Onkyo-Original DSP Listening Modes  
The following audio formats are supported by the listening modes.  
Listening Mode  
Description  
Input  
Speaker  
Source  
Layout  
This is mono (monophonic) sound.  
A
Orchestra  
Suitable for classical or operatic music,  
this mode emphasizes the surround  
channels in order to widen the stereo  
image, and simulates the natural  
reverberation of a large hall.  
A
S
D
F
C
This is stereo (stereophonic) sound. Two independent audio signal channels  
are reproduced through two speakers.  
S
O r c h e s t r a  
This is 5.1-channel surround sound. This surround system has five main  
channels of sound and a sixth subwoofer channel (called the point-one  
channel).  
D
Unplugged  
and jazz, this mode emphasizes the  
front stereo image, giving the impression  
of being right in front of the stage.  
This is 7.1-channel surround sound. This is a further sound enhancement to  
5.1-channel sound with two additional speakers that provide greater sound  
envelopment and more accurate positioning of sounds.  
*1  
F
U n p l u g g e d  
Studio-Mix  
Suitable for rock or pop music, listening  
to music in this mode creates a lively  
sound field with a powerful acoustic  
concert.  
*1  
The AV receiver outputs this source in 5.1-channel surround sound.  
S t u d i o M i x  
Speaker Layout  
The illustration shows which speakers are activated in each channel. See  
“4. Sp Config (Speaker Configuration)” for the speaker setup (page 46).  
TV Logic  
This mode adds realistic acoustics to TV  
shows produced in a TV studio,  
surround effects to the entire sound, and  
clarity to voices.  
T V L o g i c  
Z
X
C
Game-RPG  
G a m e R P G  
Game-Action  
In this mode, the sound has a dramatic  
feel with a similar atmosphere to  
Orchestra mode.  
In this mode, sound localization is  
distinct with emphasis on bass.  
G a m e – A c t i o n  
Game-Rock  
In this mode, sound pressure is  
emphasized to heighten live feel.  
G a m e – R o c k  
Game-Sports  
Suitable for audio source with much  
reverberation.  
G a m e S p o r t s  
All Ch Stereo  
Ideal for background music, this mode  
fills the entire listening area with stereo  
sound from the front, and surround.  
XC  
A l  
l
C h S t e r e o  
Full Mono  
In this mode, all speakers output the  
same sound in mono, so the sound you  
hear is the same regardless of where  
you are within the listening room.  
F u l  
l
M o n o  
En-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Playback  
Listening Mode  
Description  
Input  
Source  
Speaker  
Layout  
Listening Mode  
DSD*3  
Description  
Input  
Source  
Speaker  
Layout  
T-D (Theater-  
Dimensional)  
With this mode you can enjoy a virtual  
surround sound even with only two or  
three speakers. This works by  
controlling how sounds reach the  
listener’s left and right ears. Good  
results may not be possible if there’s too  
much reverb, so we recommend that  
you use this mode in an environment  
with little or no natural reverb.  
In this mode, audio from the input source  
is output without surround-sound  
processing. The speaker configuration  
(presence of speakers), crossover  
frequency, speaker distance, A/V Sync  
and much of the processing set via the  
audio setup are enabled. See “On-  
screen Setup” for more details  
A
S
D
F
ZXC  
D
XC  
D S D  
T D  
Dolby Digital  
D o l b y  
D
Dolby Digital Plus*4  
D
F
XC  
D o l b y  
D
+
(page 41).  
Dolby TrueHD  
Listening Modes  
D o l b y T r u e H D  
Listening Mode  
Description  
Input  
Source  
Speaker  
Layout  
DTS  
D
XC  
XC  
Pure Audio*1*2  
In this mode, the display and video  
circuitry are turned off, minimizing  
possible noise sources for the ultimate in  
high-fidelity audio reproduction. (As the  
analog video circuitry is turned off, only  
video signals input through HDMI IN can  
be output from the HDMI output.)  
D T S  
A
S
D
F
ZXC  
DTS-HD High  
Resolution Audio  
D
F
P u r e A A u d i o  
D T S H D H R  
DTS-HD Master  
Audio  
Direct  
In this mode, audio from the input source  
is output without surround-sound  
D T S H D MS T R  
D i r e c t  
DTS Express  
D
D
XC  
XC  
processing. The speaker configuration  
(presence of speakers) and speaker  
distance settings are enabled, but much  
of the processing set via the audio setup  
is disabled. See “On-screen Setup” for  
more details (page 41).  
D T S E x p r e s s  
DTS 96/24*5  
This mode is for use with DTS 96/24  
sources. This is high-resolution DTS  
with a 96 kHz sampling rate and 24-bit  
resolution, providing superior fidelity.  
Use it with DVDs that bear the DTS  
96/24 logo.  
D T S 9 6 / 2 4  
Stereo  
Sound is output from the front left and  
right speakers and subwoofer.  
S t e r e o  
Mono  
Use this mode when watching an old  
movie with a mono soundtrack, or use it  
with the foreign language soundtracks  
recorded in the left and right channels of  
some movies. It can also be used with  
DVDs or other sources containing  
multiplexed audio, such as karaoke  
DVDs.  
M o n o  
Multichannel  
multichannel sources.  
D
F
XC  
M u l  
t
i c h  
En-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Playback  
Listening Mode  
Description  
Input  
Source  
Speaker  
Layout  
Note  
*1  
(North American and Taiwanese models) This listening mode is not available.  
Pure Audio cannot be selected when Zone 2 is active.  
Dolby Pro Logic II  
Dolby Pro Logic II expands any 2-  
channel source for 5.1-channel  
*2  
Besides, if you activate Zone 2 while Pure Audio is selected, the listening mode will  
automatically switch to Direct.  
The AV receiver can input the DSD signal from HDMI IN. Depending on the player,  
setting the output on the player side to PCM might bring better sound.  
For the Blu-ray Discs, Dolby Digital is used.  
playback. It provides a very natural and  
seamless surround-sound experience  
that fully envelops the listener. As well  
as music and movies, video games can  
also benefit from the dramatic spatial  
effects and vivid imaging.  
*3  
*4  
*5  
DTS is used depending on the configuration of the AV receiver.  
• Dolby PLII Movie  
S
XC  
P L  
P L  
P L  
M o v i e  
M u s i c  
G a m e  
Use this mode with DVDs and videos  
that bear the Dolby Surround logo or  
TV shows that feature Dolby Surround.  
You can also use this mode with stereo  
movies or TV shows and the AV  
receiver will create a 5.1 surround mix  
from the 2-channel stereo.  
• Dolby PLII Music  
The listening mode may not be selected depending on the input signal. The  
signal input from the external AV components can be displayed by the function  
on the next page.  
Use this mode to add 5.1 surround to  
stereo sources such as music CDs and  
DVDs.  
• Dolby PLII Game  
Use this mode when playing game  
discs.  
DTS Neo:6  
This mode expands any 2-channel  
source for up to 5.1-channel playback. It  
uses seven full-bandwidth channels of  
matrix decoding for matrix-encoded  
material, providing a very natural and  
seamless surround sound experience  
that fully envelops the listener.  
• DTS Neo:6 Cinema  
Use this mode with any stereo movie  
(e.g., TV, DVD, VHS).  
S
XC  
N e o : 6 C i n e m a  
N e o : 6 M u s i c  
• DTS Neo:6 Music  
Use this mode with any stereo music  
source (e.g., CD, radio, cassette, TV,  
VHS, DVD).  
En-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Playback  
Displaying Source Information  
Using the Sleep Timer  
Changing the Input Display  
You can display various information about the current  
input source as follows.  
With the sleep timer, you can set the AV receiver to  
turn off automatically after a specified period.  
When you connect an u-capable Onkyo  
component, you must configure the input display so  
that ucan work properly.  
Press RECEIVER once followed by DISPLAY  
repeatedly to cycle through the available  
information.  
Press RECEIVER once followed by SLEEP  
1
1
repeatedly to select the required sleep time.  
The sleep time can be set from 90 to 10 minutes  
in 10 minute steps.  
Change the name of the input selector to  
“DOCK” or “TAPE”.  
1
Tip  
Tip  
The SLEEP indicator lights on the AV receiver’s  
display when the sleep timer has been set. The  
specified sleep time appears for about 5  
seconds, then the previous display reappears.  
• Alternatively, you can use DISPLAY on the AV  
receiver.  
• See “Name” in “8. Source Setup” for changing the  
name (page 50).  
Note  
The following information can be typically displayed.  
• “DOCK” and “TAPE” cannot be selected for the input  
selector at the same time.  
Tip  
• If you need to cancel the sleep timer, press SLEEP  
repeatedly until the SLEEP indicator goes off.  
• To check the time remaining until the AV receiver  
sleeps, press SLEEP. Note that if you press again on  
SLEEP as the time being displayed is 10 minutes or  
less, the sleep timer will go off.  
• Enter the appropriate remote control code before using  
the remote controller for the first time (page 58).  
Input source  
& volume*1  
Muting the AV Receiver  
You can temporarily mute the output of the AV  
receiver.  
Listening  
mode  
Setting the Display Brightness  
Press RECEIVER followed by MUTING.  
The output is muted and the MUTING indicator  
flashes on the AV receiver’s display.  
1
You can adjust the brightness of the AV receiver’s  
display.  
Signal  
format*2  
Press RECEIVER once followed by DIMMER  
repeatedly to switch between: normal, dim, or  
dimmer brightness.  
Tip  
1
• To unmute, press MUTING again or adjust the volume.  
• Muting is automatically cancelled when the AV  
receiver is set to standby.  
Sampling  
frequency*2  
Tip  
(North American and Taiwanese models)  
Alternatively, you can use DIMMER on the AV  
receiver.  
*1  
When AM or FM radio is used, the band, preset number,  
and frequency are displayed.  
If the input signal is digital, the signal format is displayed.  
*2  
Information is displayed for about three seconds, then  
the previously displayed information reappears.  
En-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Playback  
a short while after the AV receiver is turned on.  
IN 1/2/3/4/5). Even with multiple components  
connected through HDMI, you can easily switch  
between inputs as their previews are displayed on  
a single screen.  
Press ENTER to display the main preview  
(currently selected HDMI input) and the  
additional previews (other HDMI inputs). Using  
q/wor e/rto select a preview thumbnail and  
pressing ENTER will switch the AV receiver to  
that input source.  
Using the Home Menu  
Please wait until it becomes operable.  
Press ENTER to display the “NET” screen. If you  
want to use the Internet radio services, use q/w  
to select the desired service. Pressing ENTER  
again switches to that selection. If you want to  
play music files on a computer or media server,  
use q/wto select “DLNA” and then press  
ENTER. If you want to play music files on a  
computer or NAS (Network Attached Storage),  
use q/wto select “Home Media” and then press  
ENTER.  
The Home menu provides quick access to frequently  
used menus.  
Tip  
• The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is  
connected to the HDMI OUT.  
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.  
The Home menu will be superimposed on the TV  
screen.  
1
Tip  
Tip  
• If no video signals are present, the thumbnails will be  
filled in black.  
USB  
• Alternatively, you can use HOME on the AV receiver.  
`With this selection, you can play contents of  
portable players (iPod, etc.) and USB storage  
devices connected to the AV receiver’s USB port  
(pages 26, 27). Note that this selection will be  
grayed out for a short while after the AV receiver  
is turned on. Please wait until it becomes  
operable.  
• You can specify the number of preview thumbnails as  
well as their positioning on screen (page 54).  
Note  
• This function cannot be selected when:  
HDMI IN 6 is the current HDMI input source, or  
No signal is present on the current input source.  
• Depending on video signals, the picture may not be  
properly rendered on the preview thumbnails of  
InstaPrevue.  
H o m e  
S e t u p  
I n s t a P r e v u e  
F / W U p d a t e  
N e t w o r k S e r v i c e  
U S B  
First, press USB repeatedly to select the  
USB(Front)” or “USB(Rear)” input.  
Then, press ENTER to select a drive or browse  
the contents of the media connected, followed  
by q/wto select the desired folder or track.  
Pressing ENTER as a track is selected will start  
playback.  
Use q/wand ENTER to make the desired  
2
F/W Update  
selection.  
Press HOME to close the menu.  
`With this selection, you can update the firmware  
of the AV receiver. Note that this selection will be  
grayed out for a short while after the AV receiver  
is turned on. Please wait until it becomes  
operable.  
Setup  
Note  
`With this selection, you can access the common  
settings of the on-screen Setup menu.  
Press ENTER to display the Setup menu  
(page 44).  
• Only the front-panel USB input is compatible with  
iPod/iPhone.  
Press ENTER to start the procedure  
(page 68).  
Network Service  
Tip  
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home  
network (page 15).  
• You can also access frequently used settings from Quick  
Setup (page 41).  
`With this selection, you can use various Internet  
radio services or play the contents stored in media  
connected to your home network (page 27 to  
30). Note that this selection will be grayed out for  
InstaPrevue  
`With this selection, you can preview audio/video  
streams coming from HDMI inputs (HDMI  
En-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Advanced Operations  
Audio (page 42)  
Using the Quick Setup  
`You can change the following settings: “Bass”,  
Treble”, “PM Bass”, “Subwoofer Level”,  
Center Level”, “Audyssey”, “Dynamic EQ”,  
Dynamic Volume”, “Late Night”, “Music  
Optimizer”, and “Cinema Filter”.  
Advanced Operations  
On-screen Setup  
RECEIVER  
*1  
Information  
`You can view the information of the following  
items: “Input” and “Output”.  
ENTER,  
q/w/e/r  
*2  
Listening Mode  
`You can select the listening modes that are  
grouped in the following categories: “MOVIE/TV”,  
MUSIC”, “GAME”.  
Q SETUP  
RETURN  
Use q/wto select the category and e/rto  
select the listening mode. Press ENTER to  
switch to the selected listening mode.  
This section describes the procedure for using the  
remote controller unless otherwise specified.  
Press RECEIVER followed by Q SETUP.  
The Quick Setup will be superimposed on the TV  
screen.  
1
2
With the AV receiver connected to a TV, there are two  
ways of changing the settings on-screen: using the  
Quick Setup or the Setup Menu (HOME).  
Note  
*1  
Depending on the input source and listening mode, not  
all channels shown here output the sound.  
• This setting is not available in either of the following  
cases:  
–The “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” (page 53).  
–“HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set to “On” (page 52) and  
you’re listening through your TV speakers.  
*2  
Quick Setup  
The Quick Setup provides quick access to frequently  
used settings. You can change settings and view the  
current information.  
Q u i c k S e t u p  
I n p u t  
A u d i o  
I n f o r m a t i o n  
L i s t e n i n g M o d e  
[ E N T E R : S e l e c t ]  
Setup menu (HOME)  
Explanatory Notes  
The Setup menu (HOME) provides a convenient way  
to change the AV receiver’s various settings. Settings  
are organized into 11 categories.  
Use q/wand ENTER to make the desired  
selection.  
PM Bass  
`Off  
a
b
Press Q SETUP to close the menu.  
Press RETURN to return to the previous menu.  
Tip  
`On  
• The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is  
connected to the HDMI OUT.  
aSetting target  
Input  
`You can select input sources and view information  
bSetting options (default setting underlined)  
Note  
• The on-screen menus are displayed when:  
There is no video input, or  
The video input is 480p, 576p, 720p, 1080i, or 1080p.  
on their assignments.  
Use q/wto select an input source and view its  
assignment information.  
Pressing ENTER switches to the selected input  
source.  
En-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Advanced Operations  
These temporary adjustments are cancelled when the  
AV receiver is set to standby. To save the setting you  
made here, go to “6. Level Cal (Level Calibration)”  
(page 48) before setting the AV receiver to  
standby.  
Phase Matching Bass  
Using the Audio Settings of Quick  
Setup  
PM Bass  
`Off  
`On  
You can change various audio settings from the  
Quick Setup (page 41).  
From the warm low notes produced by a cello to the  
deep frequencies of electronic music, a good audio  
system should be able to deliver plenty of bass  
resonance.  
While traditional enhancement systems effectively  
boost low-frequency sound, they are often prone to  
the effects of phase shifting, which can overwhelm  
mid-range frequencies and muddy the sound. Our  
Phase-Matching Bass Boost technology effectively  
preserves mid-range clarity-allowing vocals and  
strings to shine-while maintaining a smooth, powerful  
bass response at all volume levels.  
Note  
Note  
• You cannot use these function while the AV receiver is  
• These settings cannot be used while a pair of headphones  
is connected.  
• Speakers that are set to “No” or “None” in “4. Sp Config  
(Speaker Configuration)” (page 46) cannot be adjusted.  
• These settings are not available in either of the following  
cases:  
The “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” (page 53).  
HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set to “On” (page 52) and  
you’re listening through your TV speakers.  
Tone Control  
®
Audyssey  
Bass  
Audyssey  
See “Audyssey” in “8. Source Setup” (page 49).  
`–10 dB to 0 dB to +10 dB in 2 dB steps  
You can boost or cut low-frequency sounds  
output from the front speakers.  
Dynamic EQ  
Note  
See “Dynamic EQ” in “8. Source Setup” (page 49).  
• The Phase Matching Bass is disabled when the Direct or  
Pure Audio (European, Australian and Asian models)  
listening mode is selected.  
• If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, this setting is fixed  
to “Off”.  
Treble  
`–10 dB to 0 dB to +10 dB in 2 dB steps  
You can boost or cut high-frequency sounds  
output from the front speakers.  
Dynamic Volume  
See “Dynamic Volume” in “8. Source Setup”  
(page 50).  
You can adjust the bass and treble for the front  
speakers, except when Direct or Pure Audio  
(European, Australian and Asian models) listening  
mode is selected.  
Note  
Operating on the AV receiver  
• These technologies can be used when all the following  
conditions are met:  
Room Correction and Speaker Setup is completed. Note  
that “Audyssey” requires the “Audyssey MultEQ Full  
Calibration” method.  
Any listening mode other than Direct or Pure Audio  
(European, Australian and Asian models) is selected.  
–A pair of headphones is not connected.  
Press TONE repeatedly to select “PM Bass”.  
1
2
Operating on the AV receiver  
Use – and + to change the setting.  
Press TONE repeatedly to select either “Bass”  
or “Treble”.  
1
Speaker Levels  
• The setting is stored individually for each input selector.  
Use – and + to adjust.  
2
Subwoofer Level  
`–15 dB to 0 dB to +12 dB in 1 dB steps  
Center Level  
`–12 dB to 0 dB to +12 dB in 1 dB steps  
You can adjust the volume of each speaker while  
listening to an input source.  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 41)  
En-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Advanced Operations  
Late Night  
Music Optimizer  
CinemaFILTER  
Late Night  
Music Optimizer  
Cinema Filter  
For Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus sources,  
`Off  
`Off  
the options are:  
`On  
`On  
`Off  
`Low:  
The Music Optimizer function enhances the sound  
quality of compressed music files. When set to “On”,  
the M.Opt indicator lights on the AV receiver’s  
display, and the MUSIC OPTIMIZER indicator (North  
American and Taiwanese models) lights on the  
front panel.  
Turn this setting on to soften overly bright movie  
soundtracks, which are typically mixed for  
reproduction in a movie theater.  
CinemaFILTER can be used with the following  
listening modes: Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus,  
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie,  
Multichannel, DTS, DTS Neo:6 Cinema, DTS 96/24,  
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS-HD Master  
Audio and DTS Express.  
Small reduction in dynamic range.  
`High:  
Large reduction in dynamic range.  
For Dolby TrueHD sources, the options are:  
`Auto:  
The Late Night function is set to “On” or “Off”  
automatically.  
`Off  
Tip  
(North American and Taiwanese models) Alternatively,  
you can use MUSIC OPTIMIZER on the AV receiver.  
Note  
Note  
• The CinemaFILTER may not work when used with certain  
input sources.  
`On  
• The Music Optimizer function only works with PCM digital  
audio input signals with a sampling rate below 48 kHz and  
analog audio input signals.  
When NET or USB input selector is selected, this function  
even works with digital audio input signals with a sampling  
rate below 48 kHz (except DSD signals and Dolby TrueHD  
signals) regardless of the PCM digital audio input signals  
with a sampling rate below 48 kHz.  
Turn this setting on to reduce the dynamic range of  
Dolby Digital material so that you can still hear quiet  
parts even when listening at low volume levels—ideal  
for watching movies late at night when you don’t want  
to disturb anyone.  
Note  
• The Music Optimizer is disabled when the Direct or Pure  
Audio (European, Australian and Asian models)  
listening mode is selected.  
• The effect of the Late Night function depends on the  
material that you are playing and the intention of the original  
sound designer, and with some material there will be little  
or no effect when you select the different options.  
• The Late Night function can be used only when the input  
source is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, or Dolby  
TrueHD.  
• The setting is stored individually for each input selector.  
• The Late Night function is set to “Off” when the AV receiver  
is set to standby. For Dolby TrueHD sources, it will be set  
to “Auto”.  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 41)  
En-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Advanced Operations  
Menu item  
Setting target  
Left  
Using the Setup Menu (HOME)  
Setup Menu Items  
6. Level Cal  
(page 48)  
Center  
Menu item  
Setting target  
Remote  
indicator  
Right  
1. HDMI Input  
(page 45)  
BD/DVD  
CBL/SAT  
GAME  
PC  
Surround Right  
Surround Left  
Subwoofer  
RECEIVER  
7. Audio Adjust Input Ch (Mux)  
AUX  
(page 48)  
Input Ch (Mono)  
TV/CD  
Panorama  
2. Component BD/DVD  
ENTER,  
q/w/e/r  
(page 46)  
Dimension  
CBL/SAT  
Center Width  
Center Image  
Listening Angle  
GAME  
RETURN  
PC  
AUX  
HOME  
8. Source Setup Audyssey  
TV/CD  
(page 49)  
Dynamic EQ [Reference Level]  
3. Digital Audio BD/DVD  
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.  
1
2
(page 46)  
Dynamic Volume  
A/V Sync  
CBL/SAT  
Use q/wto select “Setup”, and then press  
GAME  
PC  
ENTER.  
Name  
Audio Selector [Fixed Mode]  
Volume OSD  
Remote ID  
AUX  
Use q/wto select a menu item, and then press  
3
4
9. Hardware  
(page 51)  
TV/CD  
ENTER.  
4. Sp Config  
(page 46)  
Subwoofer  
Front  
Use q/wto select a setting target, and use e/r  
(North American and Taiwanese  
models)  
AM/FM Freq Step  
(European, Australian and Asian  
models)  
to change the setting.  
Center  
Press HOME to close the menu.  
Surround  
Crossover  
Double Bass  
Press RETURN to return to the previous menu.  
AM Freq Step  
Note  
Auto Standby [HDMI Through]  
5. Sp Distance Unit  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver  
by using HOME, the cursor buttons, and ENTER.  
• During Audyssey MultEQ® Room Correction and Speaker  
Setup, messages, etc., that are displayed on the TV screen  
will appear on the AV receiver’s display.  
(page 47)  
10. HDMI Setup HDMI CEC (RIHD)  
Left  
(page 52)  
HDMI Through  
Center  
Audio TV Out  
Audio Return Ch  
LipSync  
Right  
Surround Right  
Surround Left  
Subwoofer  
InstaPrevue [Sub Window, Position]  
En-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Advanced Operations  
• Do not assign an HDMI IN to the TV/CD selector while  
HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set to “On” (page 52), otherwise  
appropriate CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) operation  
will not be guaranteed.  
• If you assign “- - - - -” to an input selector that is currently  
selected in “HDMI Through” (page 53), the “HDMI  
Through” setting will be automatically switched to “Off”.  
Menu item  
Setting target  
MAC Address  
1. HDMI Input  
11. Network  
Setup  
(page 54)  
If you connect a video component to an HDMI input,  
you must assign that input to an input selector. For  
example, if you connect your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player  
to HDMI IN 2, you must assign “HDMI2” to the  
BD/DVD” input selector.  
DHCP [IP Address, Subnet Mask,  
Gateway, DNS Server]  
Proxy URL [Proxy Port]  
Network Standby  
Update Notice  
Here are the default assignments.  
Explanatory Notes  
Input selector  
BD/DVD  
CBL/SAT  
GAME  
Default assignment  
HDMI1  
4. Sp Config (Speaker Configuration)  
a
HDMI2  
HDMI3  
Subwoofer  
`Yes  
b
c
PC  
HDMI4  
AUX  
- - - - -  
`No  
TV/CD  
- - - - -  
aMenu selection  
BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, GAME, PC, AUX, TV/CD  
`HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4, HDMI5, HDMI6:  
Select the input to which the component has  
been connected.  
bSetting target  
cSetting options (default setting underlined)  
`- - - - -:  
Setup  
Select if you’re not using the HDMI OUT.  
Each HDMI input cannot be assigned to two input  
selectors or more. When HDMI1 - HDMI6 have  
already been assigned, you must first set any  
unused input selectors to “- - - - -” or you will be  
unable to assign HDMI1 - HDMI6 to other input  
selectors.  
1. HDMI Input  
2. Component  
3. Digital Audio  
4. Sp Config  
5. Sp Distance  
6. Level Cal  
7. Audio Adjust  
8. Source Setup  
9. Hardware  
10. HDMI Setup  
11. Network Setup  
BD/DVD  
CBL/SAT  
GAME  
PC  
AUX  
TV/CD  
Note  
Setting target  
• If no video component is connected to the HDMI input (even  
if the HDMI input is assigned), the AV receiver selects the  
video source based on the setting of “2. Component  
(Component Video Input)”.  
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector as  
explained here, the same HDMI IN will be set as a priority  
in the “3. Digital Audio (Digital Audio Input)” (page 46). In  
this case, if you want to use the coaxial or optical audio  
input, make the appropriate selection in the “Audio  
Selector” setting (page 51).  
Menu  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 44)  
En-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Advanced Operations  
2. Component (Component Video  
Input)  
3. Digital Audio (Digital Audio Input)  
4. Sp Config (Speaker Configuration)  
If you connect a component to a digital audio input,  
you must assign that input to an input selector. For  
example, if you connect your CD player to the  
COAXIAL IN 1, you must assign “COAXIAL1” to the  
TV/CD” input selector.  
Some of the settings in this section are set  
If you connect a video component to a component  
video input, you must assign that input to an input  
selector. For example, if you connect your Blu-ray  
Disc/DVD player to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2, you  
must assign “IN2” to the “BD/DVD” input selector.  
Here are the default assignments.  
®
automatically by Audyssey MultEQ Room  
Correction and Speaker Setup function  
(page 21).  
Here are the default assignments.  
Here you can check the settings made by  
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker  
Setup function, or set them manually, which is useful  
if you change one of the connected speakers after  
using Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and  
Speaker Setup function.  
Input selector  
BD/DVD  
CBL/SAT  
GAME  
Default assignment  
COAXIAL1  
COAXIAL2  
- - - - -  
Input selector  
BD/DVD  
CBL/SAT  
GAME  
Default assignment  
IN1  
IN2  
PC  
- - - - -  
- - - - -  
- - - - -  
- - - - -  
- - - - -  
This section explains how to specify which speakers  
are connected and their sizes.  
AUX  
- - - - -  
PC  
TV/CD  
OPTICAL  
AUX  
TV/CD  
BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, GAME, PC, AUX, TV/CD  
`COAXIAL1, COAXIAL2, OPTICAL:  
Select the input to which the component has  
been connected.  
BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, GAME, PC, AUX, TV/CD  
`IN1, IN2:  
Cone diameter  
Select the input to which the component has  
`- - - - -:  
been connected.  
`- - - - -:  
For speakers with a cone diameter larger than 6-1/2  
inches (16 cm), specify Large (full band). For those  
with a smaller diameter, specify Small (default  
crossover 100Hz).  
Select if the component is connected to an  
analog audio input.  
Select if you’re not using the COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT.  
Note  
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector in  
HDMI Input” (page 45), the same HDMI IN will be set  
as a priority in this assignment. In this case, if you want to  
use the coaxial or optical audio input, make the appropriate  
selection in the “Audio Selector” (page 51).  
• Supported sampling rates for PCM signals (stereo/mono)  
from a digital input (optical and coaxial) are  
The crossover frequency can be changed in  
“Crossover (Crossover Frequency)” (page 47).  
Note  
• These settings are not available in either of the following  
cases:  
–A pair of headphones is connected.  
The “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” (page 53).  
HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set to “On” (page 52) and  
you’re listening through your TV speakers.  
32/44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz/16, 20, 24 bit.  
Subwoofer  
`Yes  
`No  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 44)  
En-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Advanced Operations  
Front  
`Small:  
`Large:  
Select based on the cone diameter.  
Note  
5. Sp Distance (Speaker Distance)  
• For a more accurate setting, look up the frequency  
response in the manuals supplied with your speakers and  
set accordingly.  
• Choose a higher crossover frequency if you want more  
sound from your subwoofer.  
This setting is set automatically by  
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker  
Setup function (page 21).  
Note  
• If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, this setting is fixed  
to “Large”.  
Here you can specify the distance from each speaker  
to the listening position so that the sound from each  
speaker arrives at the listener’s ears as the sound  
designer intended.  
Double Bass  
*1  
*1  
Center , Surround  
This setting is NOT set automatically by  
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker  
Setup function (page 21).  
`Small:  
`Large:  
®
Note  
Select based on the cone diameter.  
• These settings are not available in either of the following  
cases:  
–A pair of headphones is connected.  
The “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” (page 53).  
HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set to “On” (page 52) and  
you’re listening through your TV speakers.  
`None  
`On  
`Off  
Note  
*1  
If the “Front” setting is set to “Small”, the “Large” option  
cannot be selected.  
Turn this setting on to boost bass output by feeding  
bass sounds from the front left, right, and center  
channels to the subwoofer.  
Crossover (Crossover Frequency)  
Unit  
`feet:  
This setting is advantageous for the speakers that  
you specified as “Small” in “4. Sp Config (Speaker  
Configuration)” (page 46). To get the best bass  
performance from your speaker system, you need  
to set the crossover frequency according to the size  
and frequency response of your speakers.  
`40Hz, 50Hz, 60Hz, 70Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz,  
120Hz, 150Hz, 200Hz  
Note  
• When the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No” or the “Front”  
setting to “Small”, this setting is fixed to “Off” (page 46).  
• This setting is set to “On” automatically when the  
Subwoofer” and “Front” settings are set for the first time  
to “Yes” and “Large” respectively.  
Distances can be set in feet. Range: 1ft to 30ft  
in 1 foot steps.  
`meters:  
Distances can be set in meters. Range: 0.3m to  
9.0m in 0.3 meter steps.  
(The default setting varies from country to country.)  
Use the diameter of the smallest speaker in your  
system when choosing the crossover frequency.  
Left, Center, Right, Surround Right, Surround  
Left, Subwoofer  
Speaker cone diameter  
Over 8 in. (20 cm)  
Crossover frequency  
40/50/60 Hz*  
70/80/90 Hz*  
`Specify the distance from each speaker to your  
listening position.  
6-1/2 to 8 in. (16 to 20 cm)  
Note  
5-1/4 to 6-1/2 in. (13 to 16 cm) 100 Hz  
• Speakers that you set to “No” or “None” in the “4. Sp Config  
(Speaker Configuration)” (page 46) cannot be selected.  
3-1/2 to 5-1/4 in. (9 to 13 cm)  
Under 3-1/2 in. (9 cm)  
120 Hz  
150/200 Hz*  
*
Choose the setting matching your speaker.  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 44)  
En-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Advanced Operations  
Dolby  
6. Level Cal (Level Calibration)  
7. Audio Adjust  
PL II Music (2ch Input)  
These settings apply to only 2-channel stereo  
sources.  
With the Audio Adjust functions and settings, you can  
adjust the sound and listening modes as you like.  
This setting is set automatically by  
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker  
Setup function (page 21).  
®
Multiplex/Mono  
Panorama  
`On  
Here you can adjust the level of each speaker with  
the built-in test tone so that the volume of each  
speaker is the same at the listening position.  
Multiplex  
Input Ch (Mux)  
With this setting, you can broaden the width of the  
front stereo image when using the Dolby Pro Logic II  
Music listening mode.  
`Main  
`Sub  
`Main/Sub  
Note  
• These settings cannot be calibrated in either of the  
following cases:  
Dimension  
This setting determines which channel of a stereo  
multiplex source is output. Use it to select audio  
channels or languages with multiplex sources,  
multilingual TV broadcasts, and so on.  
–A pair of headphones is connected.  
`–3 to 0 to +3  
The “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” (page 53).  
HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set to “On” (page 52) and  
you’re listening through your TV speakers.  
The AV receiver is muted.  
With this setting, you can move the sound field  
forward or backward when using the Dolby Pro Logic  
II Music listening mode. Higher settings move the  
sound field backward. Lower settings move it forward.  
If the stereo image feels too wide, or there’s too much  
surround sound, move the sound field forward to  
improve the balance. Conversely, if the stereo image  
feels like it’s in mono, or there’s not enough surround  
sound, move it backward.  
Mono  
*1  
Left, Center , Right, Surround Right, Surround  
Input Ch (Mono)  
`Left+Right  
`Left  
`Right  
This setting specifies the channel to be used for  
playing any 2-channel digital source such as Dolby  
Digital, or 2-channel analog/PCM source in the Mono  
listening mode.  
Left  
`–12 dB to 0 dB to +12 dB in 1 dB steps.  
*1  
Subwoofer  
`–15 dB to 0 dB to +12 dB in 1 dB steps.  
Center Width  
`0 to 3 to 7  
Note  
• Speakers that you set to “No” or “None” in “4. Sp Config  
With this setting, you can adjust the width of the  
sound from the center speaker when using the Dolby  
Pro Logic II Music listening mode. Normally, if you’re  
using a center speaker, the center channel sound is  
output from only the center speaker. (If you’re not  
using a center speaker, the center channel sound will  
be distributed to the front left and right speakers to  
create a phantom center.) This setting controls the  
front left, right, and center mix, allowing you to adjust  
the weight of the center channel sound.  
(Speaker Configuration)” (page 46) cannot be selected.  
*1  
For the center speaker and subwoofer, the level settings  
made by using the Quick Setup are saved in this menu  
(page 42).  
Tip  
• If you’re using a handheld sound level meter, adjust the  
level of each speaker so that it reads 75 dB SPL at the  
listening position, measured with C-weighting and slow  
reading.  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 44)  
En-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Advanced Operations  
Dynamic EQ  
`Off  
DTS  
8. Source Setup  
Neo:6 Music  
`On:  
Items can be set individually for each input selector.  
Press the input selector buttons to select an input  
source.  
®
Audyssey Dynamic EQ becomes active.  
The Dynamic EQ indicator will light.  
Center Image  
`0 to 2 to 5  
With Audyssey Dynamic EQ, you can enjoy great  
sound even when listening at low volume levels.  
Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of  
deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by  
taking into account human perception and room  
acoustics. It does so by selecting the correct  
frequency response and surround volume levels  
moment-by-moment so that the content sounds the  
way it was created at any volume level — not just at  
With this setting, you can specify by how much the  
front left and right channel output is attenuated in  
order to create the center channel.  
Changing the value from “0” to “5” will spread the  
sound of the center channel to left and right  
(outwards).  
®
Audyssey  
The tone for each speaker is set automatically by  
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker  
®
Setup. To enable the following settings, you must first  
perform the Room Correction and Speaker Setup  
(page 21).  
• These technologies cannot be used when a pair of  
headphones is connected.  
Theater-Dimensional  
Listening Angle  
`Wide:  
Reference Level  
Audyssey Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset  
`0 dB:  
Audyssey  
`Off  
`Movie:  
Select this setting for movie material.  
The Audyssey indicator will light.  
`Music:  
Select if the listening angle is greater than 30  
degrees.  
`Narrow:  
This should be selected for movie contents.  
`5 dB :  
Select this setting for content that has a very  
wide dynamic range, such as classical music.  
`10 dB:  
Select this setting for jazz or other music that  
has a wider dynamic range. This setting should  
also be selected for TV content as that is usually  
mixed at 10 dB below film reference.  
`15 dB:  
Select if the listening angle is less than 30  
degrees.  
With this setting, you can optimize the Theater-  
Dimensional listening mode by specifying the angle of  
the front left and right speakers relative to the  
listening position. Ideally, the front left and right  
speakers should be equidistant from the listening  
position and at an angle close to one of the two  
available settings.  
Select this setting for music material.  
The Audyssey indicator will light.  
Note  
• When “Audyssey Quick Start” has been used for  
measurement, “Audyssey” cannot be selected.  
• Audyssey equalizing does not work with DSD sources.  
Select this setting for pop/rock music or other  
program material that is mixed at very high  
listening levels and has a compressed dynamic  
range.  
Front left speaker  
Front right speaker  
Listening angle: 30°  
Movies are mixed in rooms calibrated for film  
reference. To achieve the same reference level in a  
home theater system each speaker level must be  
adjusted so that –30 dBFS band-limited (500 Hz to  
2000 Hz) pink noise produces 75 dB sound pressure  
level at the listening position. A home theater system  
automatically calibrated by Audyssey MultEQ will play  
Note  
• For best results, we recommend setting “Narrow” to 20°  
and “Wide” to 40°.  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 44)  
En-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Advanced Operations  
®
at reference level when the master volume control is  
set to the 64 position. At that level you can hear the  
mix as the mixers heard it.  
About Audyssey Dynamic EQ  
A/V Sync  
Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of  
deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by  
taking into account human perception and room  
acoustics. Dynamic EQ selects the correct frequency  
response and surround levels moment-by-moment at  
any user-selected volume setting. The result is bass  
response, tonal balance and surround impression  
that remain constant despite changes in volume.  
Dynamic EQ combines information from incoming  
source levels with actual output sound levels in the  
room, a prerequisite for delivering a loudness  
A/V Sync  
`0 msec to 400 msec in 10 msec steps.  
®
Audyssey Dynamic EQ is referenced to the  
standard film mix level. It makes adjustments to  
maintain the reference response and surround  
envelopment when the volume is turned down from  
64. However, film reference level is not always used  
in music or other non-film content.  
Audyssey Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset  
provides three offsets from the film level reference  
(5 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB) that can be selected when  
the mix level of the content is not within the standard.  
When using progressive scanning on your Blu-ray  
Disc/DVD player, you may find that the picture and  
sound are out of sync. With this setting, you can  
correct this by delaying the audio signals.  
Press ENTER to view the TV picture while setting the  
delay when the video source is output to HDMI OUT.  
To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.  
correction solution. Audyssey Dynamic EQ works in  
The range of values you can adjust will depend on  
whether your TV or display supports HDMI Lip Sync  
and if the “LipSync” setting is set to “On” or not  
(page 53).  
®
tandem with Audyssey MultEQ to provide well-  
Note  
balanced sound for every listener at any volume level.  
• If “Dynamic EQ” setting is set to “Off”, this technology  
cannot be used.  
®
About Audyssey Dynamic Volume  
Dynamic Volume  
`Off  
`Light:  
Activates Light Compression Mode.  
`Medium:  
Activates Medium Compression Mode.  
`Heavy:  
Note  
Audyssey Dynamic Volume solves the problem of  
large variations in volume level between television  
programs, commercials, and between the soft and  
loud passages of movies. Dynamic Volume looks at  
the preferred volume setting by the user and then  
monitors how the volume of program material is being  
perceived by listeners in real time to decide whether  
an adjustment is needed. Whenever necessary,  
Dynamic Volume makes the necessary rapid or  
gradual adjustments to maintain the desired playback  
volume level while optimizing the dynamic range.  
Audyssey Dynamic EQ is integrated into  
Dynamic Volume so that as the playback volume is  
adjusted automatically, the perceived bass response,  
tonal balance, surround impression and dialog clarity  
remain the same whether watching movies, flipping  
between television channels or changing from stereo  
to surround sound content.  
• A/V Sync is disabled when the Pure Audio (European,  
Australian and Asian models) or Direct listening mode is  
used with an analog input source.  
• This setting cannot be used with the NET and USB input  
selectors.  
Preset Name For Input Selector  
Activates Heavy Compression Mode. This  
setting affects volume the most. It quiets the  
loud parts, such as explosions, and boosts the  
quiet parts so they can be heard.  
Name  
`- - -, Blu-ray, DVD, HD DVD, VCR, DVR, Tivo,  
CableSTB, SAT STB, PS3, Wii, Xbox, PC, TV,  
CD, TAPE, iPod, DOCK:  
To reset to the default, select “- - -”.  
You can enter a preset name for each individual input  
selector for easy identification. When entered, the  
preset name will be displayed.  
Note  
• If you make Dynamic Volume active, “Dynamic EQ” is set  
to “On”. The Dynamic Vol indicator will light.  
• When “Dynamic EQ” is set to “Off”, “Dynamic Volume” is  
automatically switched to “Off”.  
Note  
• You can’t assign the same preset name to multiple input  
selectors.  
• This setting cannot be used for the AM, FM, NET or USB  
input selector.  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 44)  
En-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Advanced Operations  
Audio Selector  
Setting the Incoming Digital Signal (Fixed  
Mode)  
9. Hardware  
OSD  
Audio Selector  
`ARC:  
Fixed Mode  
The audio signal from your TV tuner can be sent  
to the HDMI OUT of the AV receiver.  
With this selection, the TV’s audio can be  
automatically selected as a priority among other  
assignments.  
`Off:  
Volume OSD  
`On  
`Off  
Turn this setting on to display the volume level on the  
TV screen while it is adjusted.  
*1  
The format is detected automatically. If no digital  
input signal is present, the corresponding analog  
input is used instead.  
`PCM:  
`HDMI:  
Only 2-channel PCM format input signals will be  
heard. If the input signal is not PCM, the PCM  
indicator will flash and noise may also be  
produced.  
This can be selected when HDMI IN has been  
assigned as an input source. If both HDMI  
(HDMI IN) and digital audio inputs (COAXIAL IN  
or OPTICAL IN) have been assigned, HDMI  
input is automatically selected as a priority.  
`COAXIAL:  
Remote ID  
Remote ID  
`1, 2, or 3  
When several Onkyo components are used in the  
same room, their remote ID codes may overlap. To  
differentiate the AV receiver from other components,  
you can change its remote ID from “1”, to “2” or “3”.  
`DTS:  
Only DTS (but not DTS-HD) format input signals  
will be heard. If the input signal is not DTS, the  
dts indicator will flash and there will be no  
sound.  
This can be selected when COAXIAL IN has  
been assigned as an input source. If both  
coaxial and HDMI inputs have been assigned,  
coaxial input is automatically selected as a  
priority.  
When “HDMI”, “COAXIAL” or “OPTICAL” is selected  
in the “Audio Selector” setting, you can then specify  
the signal type in “Fixed Mode”.  
Normally, the AV receiver detects the signal format  
automatically. However, if you experience either of  
the following issues when playing PCM or DTS  
material, you can manually set the signal format to  
PCM or DTS.  
• If the beginnings of tracks from a PCM source are  
cut off, try setting the format to PCM.  
• If noise is produced when fast forwarding or  
reversing a DTS CD, try setting the format to DTS.  
Note  
• If you do change the AV receiver’s remote ID, be sure to  
change the remote controller to the same ID (see below),  
otherwise, you won’t be able to control it with the remote  
controller.  
`OPTICAL:  
This can be selected when OPTICAL IN has  
been assigned as an input source. If both optical  
and HDMI inputs have been assigned, optical  
input is automatically selected as a priority.  
`Analog:  
The AV receiver always outputs analog signals.  
You can set priorities of audio output when there are  
both digital and analog inputs.  
Changing the remote controller’s ID  
While holding down RECEIVER, press and  
hold down Q SETUP until the remote indicator  
lights (about 3 seconds).  
1
Use the number buttons to enter ID 1, 2, or 3.  
The remote indicator flashes twice.  
2
Note  
Note  
• This setting can be made only for the input source that is  
assigned as HDMI IN, COAXIAL IN, or OPTICAL IN.  
• This setting cannot be used with the NET and USB input  
selectors.  
• The setting will be reset to “Off” when you change the  
setting in “Audio Selector”.  
*1  
You can select “ARC” if you select the TV/CD input  
selector. But you cannot if you’ve selected “Off” in the  
Audio Return Ch” setting (page 53).  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 44)  
En-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Advanced Operations  
HDMI Through  
`Off  
Tuner  
10. HDMI Setup  
AM/FM Freq Step (North American and  
Taiwanese models)  
`10 kHz/200 kHz:  
`On  
HDMI CEC (RIHD)  
`Off  
`On  
This setting enables or disables the Auto Standby  
during HDMI Through by detecting the audio/video  
input signal.  
When this setting is set to “On”, the AV receiver will  
automatically enter standby mode if there is no audio  
and no video signal input during HDMI Through for 30  
minutes. (The Auto Standby function does not work  
when Zone 2 is on.)  
`9 kHz/50 kHz:  
Turn this setting on to allow p-compatible  
components connected via HDMI to be controlled by  
the AV receiver (page 15).  
Select the frequency step according to your  
area.  
AM Freq Step (European, Australian and Asian  
models)  
`10 kHz:  
`9 kHz:  
Select the frequency step according to your  
area.  
For AM/FM tuning to work properly, you must specify  
the AM/FM frequency step used in your area.  
Note  
• When the setting is set to “On” and the menu is closed, the  
names of connected p-compatible components and  
RIHD On” are displayed on the AV receiver.  
Search…(name)RIHD On”  
When this setting is set to “Off”, the status of HDMI  
Through is continued regardless of audio/video input  
signal.  
When the AV receiver cannot receive the name of the  
component, it is displayed as “Player*” or “Recorder*”, etc  
(“*” shows up and indicates the number of components,  
when two or more are received).  
Tip  
• Entering standby mode is possible by setting “HDMI CEC  
(RIHD)” to “On” and using CEC-compatible component  
regardless of the above-mentioned setting.  
See “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” in “10. HDMI Setup” for linked  
operation.  
Note  
• When an p-compatible component is connected to  
the AV receiver via an HDMI cable, the name of the  
connected component is displayed on the AV receiver’s  
display. For example, while you are watching TV  
broadcasting, if you operate a Blu-ray Disc/DVD player  
(being powered on) with the remote control of the AV  
receiver, the name of the Blu-ray Disc/DVD player will be  
displayed on the AV receiver.  
When this setting is changed, all radio presets will be deleted.  
• When the HDMI Through is enabled, the power  
consumption slightly increases.  
Auto Standby  
Auto Standby  
`Off  
Note  
• This setting is fixed to “Off” when “Auto Standby” is set to  
Off”.  
• Set it to Offwhen a connected piece of equipment is not  
compatible or it is unclear whether the equipment is  
compatible or not.  
• If operation is not normal when set to On, change the  
setting to Off.  
`On  
When “Auto Standby” is set to “On”, the ASb  
indicator lights and the AV receiver will automatically  
enter standby mode if there is no operation for 30  
minutes with no audio and no video signal input.  
Auto Standby” will appear on the AV receiver’s  
display and OSD 30 seconds before the Auto  
Standby comes on.  
Default setting: On (European, Australian and  
Asian models), Off (North American and  
Taiwanese models)  
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction manual for  
details.  
• When the “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” setting is set to “On”, the  
power consumption in standby mode slightly increases.  
(Depending on the TV status, the AV receiver will enter  
standby mode as usual.)  
• When the source equipment is connected with the u  
connection, it may malfunction if “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set  
to “On”.  
Note  
• Set to “On, the Auto Standby function may activate itself  
during playback with some sources.  
• The Auto Standby function does not work when Zone 2 is on.  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 44)  
En-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Advanced Operations  
HDMI Through  
`Off  
Audio TV Out  
`Off  
Audio Return Ch  
`Off  
`BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, GAME, PC, AUX, TV/CD:  
Selects the input source for which the HDMI  
Through function is enabled.  
`On  
`Auto:  
The audio signal from your TV tuner can be sent  
to the HDMI OUT of the AV receiver.  
This preference determines whether the incoming  
audio signal is output from the HDMI output. You may  
want to turn this preference on if your TV is  
connected to the HDMI output and you want to listen  
to the audio from a connected component through  
your TV’s speakers. Normally, this should be set to  
Off”.  
`Last:  
The audio return channel (ARC) function allows an  
ARC capable TV to send the audio stream to HDMI  
OUT of the AV receiver. To use this function, you  
must select the TV/CD input selector and your TV  
must be ARC capable. The ARC indicator will light  
when the audio signal is detected. Default setting:  
- - - -”  
The HDMI Through function is activated on the  
input source selected at the time of setting the  
AV receiver to standby mode.  
When enabling the HDMI Through function,  
regardless of whether the AV receiver is on or in  
standby, both audio and video streams from an HDMI  
input will be output to the TV or other components via  
HDMI connection. The HDMI indicator will be dimly-lit  
in standby mode. Note that the indicator may not light  
under certain conditions (page 20).  
This setting is fixed to “Auto” automatically when the  
above “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” setting is set to “On”,  
resulting in automatic input source selection.  
Note  
• If “On” is selected and the audio can be output from the TV,  
the AV receiver will output no sound through its speakers.  
In this case, “TV Speaker” appears on the AV receiver’s  
display by pressing DISPLAY.  
• When “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set to “On”, this setting is  
fixed to “Auto”.  
Note  
This setting is fixed to “- - - -” when the “HDMI CEC (RIHD)”  
setting is set to “Off”.  
• This setting is set to “Auto” automatically when the “HDMI  
CEC (RIHD)” setting is set to “On” for the first time.  
• If you set “Audio Return Ch” to “Auto”, the “Audio  
Selector” settings of the TV/CD input selector will be  
automatically switched to “ARC” (page 51).  
• With some TVs and input signals, no sound may be output  
even when this setting is set to “On”.  
• When “Audio TV Out” or HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set to On”  
and you’re listening through your TV’s speakers, turning up  
the AV receiver’s volume control will make the sound be  
output from the AV receiver’s front left and right speakers.  
To stop the AV receiver’s speakers producing sound,  
change the settings, change your TV’s settings, or turn  
down the AV receiver’s volume.  
• Listening mode cannot be changed when this setting is set  
to “On” and the audio is output from the TV.  
• This setting is set to “Off” automatically when the “HDMI  
CEC (RIHD)” setting is set to “Off”.  
Note  
Tip  
• Only an input source assigned to an HDMI IN via  
HDMI Input” setting is enabled (page 45).  
• The power consumption in standby mode will increase  
during the HDMI Through function; however in the following  
cases, the power consumption can be saved:  
The TV is in standby mode.  
You are watching a TV program.  
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction manual for  
details.  
• After changing the settings of the “HDMI CEC (RIHD)”,  
HDMI Through” or “Audio Return Ch”, turn off the power  
on all connected pieces of equipment and then turn them on  
again. Refer to the user’s manuals for all connected pieces  
of equipment.  
LipSync  
`Off  
`On  
• Depending on the connected component, the correct input  
source may not be selected with the setting fixed to “Auto”.  
• This setting is set to “Off” automatically when the “HDMI  
CEC (RIHD)” setting is set to “Off”.  
This function allows the AV receiver to automatically  
correct any delay between the video and the audio,  
based on the data from the connected monitor.  
Note  
• This function works only if your HDMI-compatible TV  
supports HDMI Lip Sync.  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 44)  
En-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Advanced Operations  
InstaPrevue  
DHCP  
`Enable  
`Disable  
11. Network Setup  
These settings apply to “InstaPrevue” of the Home  
menu (page 40) and specify the preview display of  
HDMI video streams.  
This section explains how to configure the AV  
receiver’s network settings manually.  
This setting determines whether or not the AV  
receiver uses DHCP to automatically configure its IP  
Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server  
settings.  
After modifying the network settings, you must  
confirm the changes by executing “Save”.  
If your router’s DHCP server is enabled, you don’t  
need to change any of these settings, as the AV  
receiver is set to use DHCP to configure itself  
automatically by default (i.e., DHCP is set to  
Enable”). If, however, your router’s DHCP server is  
disabled (you’re for example using static IP), you’ll  
need to configure these settings yourself, in which  
case, a knowledge of Ethernet networking is  
essential.  
Sub Window  
`Multi:  
Displays preview thumbnails all at once.  
`Single:  
Displays preview thumbnails one-by-one.  
With this setting, you can set the number of preview  
thumbnails displayed.  
Note  
• If you select “Disable”, you must configure the “IP  
Address”, “Subnet Mask”, “Gateway”, and “DNS Server”  
settings yourself.  
Position  
(with “Sub Window” set to “Multi”)  
`Top, Bottom, Left, Right  
IP Address  
`Class A:  
10.0.0.0” to “10.255.255.255”  
(with “Sub Window” set to “Single”)  
`UpperL, UpperR, LowerL, LowerR  
With this setting, you can set the position of preview  
thumbnails on the TV screen.  
`Class B:  
172.16.0.0” to “172.31.255.255”  
`Class C:  
192.168.0.0” to “192.168.255.255”  
Enter a static IP address provided by your Internet  
Service Provider (ISP).  
What’s DHCP?  
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is used  
by routers, computers, the AV receiver, and other  
devices to automatically configure themselves on a  
network.  
Note  
What’s DNS?  
• Depending on video signals, the picture may not be  
properly rendered on the preview thumbnails of  
InstaPrevue.  
Most routers use Class C IP addresses.  
The DNS (Domain Name System) translates domain  
names into IP addresses. For example, when you  
enter a domain name such as www.onkyousa.com in  
your Web browser, before accessing the site, your  
browser uses DNS to translate this into an IP  
address, in this case 63.148.251.142.  
Subnet Mask  
Enter the subnet mask address provided by your ISP  
(typically 255.255.255.0).  
Gateway  
Enter the gateway address provided by your ISP.  
MAC Address  
This is the AV receiver’s MAC (Media Access  
Control) address. This address cannot be changed.  
DNS Server  
Enter the DNS server address provided by your ISP.  
Proxy URL  
To use a Web proxy, enter its URL here.  
Proxy Port  
If you’re using a Web proxy, enter a proxy port  
number here.  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 44)  
En-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Advanced Operations  
Network Standby  
`On  
`Off  
This setting enables or disables control over the  
network.  
When enabled, the NET indicator will be dimly-lit  
while the AV receiver is in standby mode. Note that  
the indicator may not light under certain conditions  
(page 20).  
Note  
• When set to “On”, the power consumption slightly  
increases in standby mode.  
Update Notice  
`Enable  
`Disable  
When this setting is enabled, you will be notified if a  
firmware update via network of high importance is  
available.  
Note  
• Selecting “Never Remind me” on the notification window  
will switch this setting to “Disable” (page 20).  
• For details on the update notification, see “Firmware  
Update Notification” (page 20).  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 44)  
En-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Advanced Operations  
Controlling Zone 2 Components  
Zone 2  
Press ZONE2, then point the remote controller  
at the AV receiver and press 8RECEIVER.  
Zone 2 turns on, the Z2 indicator lights on the AV  
receiver’s display.  
1
In addition to the main listening room, you can also  
enjoy playback in another room, or as we call Zone 2.  
And, you can select a different source for each room.  
Operating on the AV receiver  
Input selector buttons  
ZONE 2 OFF  
To select an input source for Zone 2, press  
ZONE2, followed by an INPUT SELECTOR  
button.  
2
3
Making Zone 2 Connections  
Connecting the Zone Speakers to an  
Additional Amplifier  
To turn off Zone 2, press ZONE2, followed by  
8RECEIVER.  
The zone is turned off.  
This setup allows 5.1-channel playback in your main  
listening room and 2-channel stereo playback in  
Zone 2.  
To turn on Zone 2 and select an input source,  
press ZONE 2 followed by an input selector  
button within 8 seconds.  
Zone 2 turns on, the Z2 indicator lights on the AV  
receiver’s display.  
1
2
Note  
Only analog, NET or USB input source is output from the  
ZONE 2 LINE OUT jacks.  
Main room  
• You cannot select different AM or FM radio stations for your  
main room and Zone 2. The same AM/FM radio station will  
be heard in each room. Namely, if you have selected an FM  
station for the main room, that station will also be output in  
Zone 2.  
• You cannot select different input selector NET or USB for  
your main room and Zone 2. Namely, if you have selected  
USB input selector for Zone 2, USB input selector will be  
selected in main room even if NET has been selected for  
main room.  
TV  
To select the same source as the main room’s,  
press ZONE 2 twice. “Z2 Sel: Source” appears  
on the AV receiver’s display.  
AV receiver  
To turn off Zone 2, press OFF.  
The zone is turned off.  
Operating on the remote controller  
To control Zone 2, you must press ZONE2 on the  
remote controller first.  
• When Zone 2 is activated and its input selector is selected,  
the power consumption of standby mode slightly increases.  
• While Zone 2 is on, ufunctions will not work.  
• When setting the AV receiver to standby mode while Zone  
2 is active, the Z2 indicator is dimly lit.  
ZONE2  
8RECEIVER  
• Activating Zone 2 in the main room when the listening  
mode is set to Pure Audio (European, Australian and  
Asian models) will automatically switch it to Direct.  
INPUT  
SELECTOR  
Zone 2  
IN  
R
L
Receiver/  
integrated amp  
Note  
• The volume of Zone 2 must be set on the Zone 2 amplifier.  
En-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Controlling Other Components  
Entering Remote Control Codes  
Remapping Colored Buttons  
Controlling Other  
Components  
You’ll need to enter a code for each component that  
you want to control.  
You can change the configuration of colored buttons,  
with which REMOTE MODE buttons are preset.  
You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to  
control your other AV components, including those  
made by other manufacturers. This section explains  
how to enter the remote control code for a component  
that you want to control: DVD, TV, CD, etc.  
Look up the appropriate remote control code  
While holding down the REMOTE MODE  
1
1
in the separate Remote Control Codes list.  
The codes are organized by category (e.g., DVD  
player, TV, etc.).  
button that you want to program, press and  
hold down A (Red) until the remote indicator  
lights (about 3 seconds).  
You can only change colored buttons for  
components whose codes belong to categories  
of the Remote Control Codes list (BD/DVD  
player, TV, cable set-top box, etc).  
While holding down the REMOTE MODE  
2
Preprogrammed Remote Control  
Codes  
button to which you want to assign a code,  
press and hold down DISPLAY (about 3  
seconds).  
The following REMOTE MODE buttons are  
preprogrammed with remote control codes for  
controlling the components listed. You do not need to  
enter a remote control code to control these  
components.  
Within 30 seconds, press the colored buttons  
The remote indicator lights.  
in the order that you want to reassign them.  
The button presses are assigned to each button  
from left to right. The remote indicator flashes  
twice, indicating that the sequence has been  
successfully assigned. If the sequence is not  
successfully assigned, the remote indicator will  
flash once slowly.  
Note  
• Remote control codes cannot be entered for  
RECEIVER and the multi zone button.  
• Only TV remote control codes can be entered for TV.  
• Except for RECEIVER, TV, and the multi zone button,  
remote control codes from any category can be  
assigned for the REMOTE MODE buttons. However,  
these buttons also work as input selector buttons, so  
choose a REMOTE MODE button that corresponds  
with the input to which you connect your component.  
For example, if you connect your CD player to the CD  
input, choose TV/CD when entering its remote control  
code.  
For details on controlling these components, see the  
indicated pages.  
BD/DVD Onkyo Blu-ray Disc player (page 59)  
TV/CD Onkyo CD player (page 58)  
Tip  
PC  
Apple TV  
• To reset the REMOTE MODE buttons to their default  
settings, see “Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons”  
(page 58).  
Note  
Within 30 seconds, use the number buttons to  
3
• If any other button than the colored buttons is pressed, the  
operation will be cancelled.  
• This operation cannot be done while the AV receiver is in  
Receiver mode or when Zone 2 is active.  
enter the 5-digit remote control code.  
The remote indicator flashes twice.  
If the remote control code is not entered  
successfully, the remote indicator will flash once  
slowly.  
Note  
• Though the provided remote control codes are correct at  
the time of release, they are subject to change.  
En-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Controlling Other Components  
`32901/33104/33504:  
Onkyo HD DVD player  
`70868:  
Remote Control Codes for Onkyo  
Components Connected via RI  
Controlling Other Components  
By pressing the REMOTE MODE button that’s been  
programmed with the remote control code for your  
component, you can control your component as  
described below.  
For details on entering a remote control code for other  
components, see “Entering Remote Control Codes”  
(page 57).  
Onkyo MD recorder without u  
Onkyo components that are connected via uare  
controlled by pointing the remote controller at the AV  
receiver, not the component. This allows you to  
control components that are out of view, in a rack, for  
example.  
`71323:  
Onkyo CD recorder without u  
`82990:  
Onkyo Dock without u  
Make sure the Onkyo component is connected  
1
Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons  
Controlling a TV  
with an ucable and an analog audio cable  
(RCA).  
You can reset a REMOTE MODE button to its default  
remote control code.  
TV is preprogrammed with the remote control code  
See “Connecting Onkyo RI Components” for  
details (page 19).  
*1  
for controlling a TV that supports the p  
(limited to some models). The TV must be able to  
receive remote control commands via pand  
be connected to the AV receiver via HDMI. If  
controlling your TV via pdoesn’t work very  
well, program your TV’s remote control code into TV  
and use the TV remote mode to control your TV.  
Use the following remote control codes:  
`11807/13100/13500:  
While holding down the REMOTE MODE  
1
Enter the appropriate remote control code for  
a REMOTE MODE button, by referring to the  
previous section.  
2
button that you want to reset, press and hold  
down HOME until the remote indicator lights  
(about 3 seconds).  
`42157:  
Within 30 seconds, press the REMOTE MODE  
button again.  
Onkyo cassette tape deck with u  
2
`81993:  
The remote indicator flashes twice, indicating that  
the button has been reset.  
Each REMOTE MODE button is preprogrammed  
with a remote control code. When a button is  
reset, its preprogrammed code is restored.  
Onkyo Dock with u  
TV with p  
Press the REMOTE MODE button, point the  
remote controller at the AV receiver, and  
operate the component.  
3
Controlling Apple TV  
By programming the supplied remote controller with  
the appropriate remote control code, you can use it to  
operate your Apple TV.  
Controlling Onkyo components without u  
If you want to control an Onkyo component by  
pointing the remote controller directly at it, or you  
want to control an Onkyo component that’s not  
connected via u, use the following remote control  
codes:  
Resetting the Remote Controller  
Use the following remote control codes:  
`02615:  
You can reset the remote controller to its default  
settings.  
Apple TV  
While holding down RECEIVER, press and  
hold down HOME until the remote indicator  
lights (about 3 seconds).  
1
`30627:  
Onkyo DVD player without u  
`71817:  
Within 30 seconds, press RECEIVER again.  
The remote indicator flashes twice, indicating that  
the remote controller has been reset.  
2
Onkyo CD player without u  
`32900/33100/33500:  
Onkyo Blu-ray Disc player  
En-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Controlling Other Components  
TV operation  
Controlling a Blu-ray Disc/DVD Player, HD  
DVD Player or DVD Recorder  
Press the appropriate REMOTE  
MODE button first.  
Available buttons  
Number: 1 to 9, 0  
a 8, INPUT, TV VOL q/w, g  
BD/DVD is preprogrammed with the remote control  
code for controlling a component that supports the  
MUTING  
Number: +10*2  
DISPLAY  
CH +/–  
GUIDE  
*1  
b
i
k
l
m
n
o
p
(limited to some models). The component  
c q/w/e/r, ENTER  
must be able to receive remote control commands via  
pand be connected to the AV receiver via  
HDMI.  
h
SETUP  
PREV CH  
RETURN  
AUDIO*2  
CLR  
d
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,  
*2  
Use the following remote control codes:  
`32910/33101/33501/31612:  
7, 6  
A (Red)*2  
f
i
j
B (Green)*2  
C (Yellow)*2  
D (Blue)*2  
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player with p  
*1  
The psupported by the AV receiver is the CEC  
a
b
system control function of the HDMI standard.  
Blu-ray Disc player/HD DVD player operation  
k
l
Available buttons  
TOP MENU  
b
h 8SOURCE  
c
d
DISPLAY  
c q/w/e/r, ENTER  
i
m
n
SETUP  
MUTING  
CH +/–  
d
j
k
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,  
7, 6  
DISC +/–  
MENU  
e
f
A (Red)  
f
l
m
n
o
B (Green)  
RETURN  
AUDIO*2  
CLR  
C (Yellow)  
D (Blue)  
Number: 1 to 9, 0  
Number: +10*2  
g
g
o
En-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Controlling Other Components  
DVD player/DVD recorder operation  
Satellite receiver/Cable receiver operation  
Press the appropriate REMOTE  
MODE button first.  
Available buttons  
TOP MENU  
Available buttons  
GUIDE  
b
h 8SOURCE  
b
h 8SOURCE  
DISPLAY  
DISPLAY  
c q/w/e/r, ENTER  
i
c q/w/e/r, ENTER  
i
SETUP  
MUTING  
CH +/–  
SETUP  
MUTING  
CH +/–  
d
j
k
d
j
k
l
m
n
o
h
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,  
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,  
7, 6  
7, 6  
DISC +/–  
MENU  
PREV CH  
RETURN  
AUDIO  
CLR  
A (Red)*2  
A (Red)  
f
l
m
n
o
f
RETURN  
AUDIO*2  
CLR  
B (Green)  
C (Yellow)*2  
D (Blue)*2  
B (Green)  
C (Yellow)  
D (Blue)  
i
j
Number: 1 to 9, 0  
Number: 1 to 9, 0  
g
g
Number: +10*2  
Number: +10  
k
l
VCR/PVR operation  
CD player/CD recorder/MD recorder operation  
b
Available buttons  
Available buttons  
Number: 1 to 9, 0  
GUIDE  
b
h 8SOURCE  
c q/w/e/r, ENTER  
g
c
d
DISPLAY  
SETUP  
Number: +10  
c q/w/e/r, ENTER  
i
d
m
n
SETUP  
MUTING  
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,  
h 8SOURCE  
d
j
7, 6  
CH +/–  
DISPLAY  
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,  
k
i
7, 6  
PREV CH  
RETURN  
CLR  
SEARCH  
REPEAT  
RANDOM  
MODE  
MUTING  
DISC +/–  
CLR  
l
m
o
f
j
k
o
e
f
Number: 1 to 9, 0  
g
Number: +10  
Cassette tape deck operation  
Available buttons  
Note  
e 1, t(Reverse  
Playback), 2, 5, 4,  
7, 6  
h 8SOURCE  
• With some components, certain buttons may not work as  
expected, and some may not work at all.  
• See “Controlling Your iPod/iPhone” about the operation of  
iPod/iPhone (page 62).  
g
MUTING  
j
o
*2  
The pfunction is not supported. The p  
supported by the AV receiver is the CEC system control  
function of the HDMI standard.  
En-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Controlling Other Components  
automatically switch to the input to which the RI Dock  
is connected.  
The Dock is sold separately. Models sold are  
different depending on the region.  
For the latest information on the Onkyo Dock  
components, see the Onkyo web site at:  
http://www.onkyo.com  
Before using the Onkyo Dock components, update  
your iPod/iPhone with the latest software, available  
from the Apple web site.  
For supported iPod/iPhone models, see the  
instruction manual of the Onkyo Dock.  
Using the Onkyo Dock  
RI Dock  
Other Remote Operations  
You can use the remote controller that came with the  
AV receiver to control other iPod/iPhone functions.  
The available functionality depends on the AV  
receiver.  
With the RI Dock, you can easily play the music of  
your iPod/iPhone, or watch the slideshows and  
videos of your iPod/iPhone on a TV. In addition, the  
on-screen display (OSD) allows you to view,  
navigate, and select your iPod/iPhone model’s  
contents on your TV, and with the supplied remote  
controller, you can control your iPod/iPhone from the  
comfort of your sofa. You can even use the AV  
receiver’s remote controller to operate your  
iPod/iPhone.  
Note  
• If you use your iPod/iPhone with any other accessories,  
iPod/iPhone playback detection may not work.  
• The System On function may not work depending on the RI  
Dock.  
iPod Alarm  
If you use the Alarm function on your iPod to start  
playback, the AV receiver will turn on at the specified  
time and select your iPod as the input source  
automatically.  
Note  
• Enter the appropriate remote control code before using the  
AV receiver’s remote controller for the first time  
(page 58).  
Note  
• Connect the RI Dock to the AV receiver with an ucable  
(page 19).  
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to “HDD” or  
“HDD/DOCK”.  
• Depending on your iPod/iPhone model and generation,  
some of the linked operations may not be available.  
• This linked operation won’t work while a video is being  
played or when the sound set for the alarm is a built-in  
sound (Beep).  
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to “DOCK”  
(page 39).  
• This linked operation won’t work with models on which  
music files cannot be used to set the alarm sound.  
System Function  
System On  
Operating Notes  
• Use the AV receiver’s volume control to adjust the  
playback volume.  
• While your iPod/iPhone is inserted in the RI Dock,  
its volume control has no effect.  
• If you do adjust the volume control on your  
iPod/iPhone while it’s inserted in the RI Dock, be  
careful that it’s not set too loud before you reconnect  
your headphones.  
When you turn on the AV receiver, the RI Dock and  
iPod/iPhone turn on automatically. In addition, when  
RI Dock and iPod/iPhone are on, the AV receiver can  
be turned on by pressing 8SOURCE.  
Auto Power On  
If you press the remote controller’s 1(Playback)  
while the AV receiver is on standby, the AV receiver  
will automatically turn on, select your iPod/iPhone as  
the input source, and your iPod/iPhone will start  
playback.  
Direct Change  
If you start iPod/iPhone playback while listening to  
another input source, the AV receiver will  
En-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Controlling Other Components  
uDock operation  
Controlling Your iPod/iPhone  
Press the appropriate REMOTE  
MODE button first.  
Available buttons  
By pressing the REMOTE MODE button that’s been  
programmed with the remote control code for your  
Dock, you can control your iPod/iPhone in the Dock  
with the buttons described further in this section.  
See “Entering Remote Control Codes” for details on  
entering a remote control code (page 57).  
See the Dock’s instruction manual for more  
information.  
TOP MENU*1  
a
e 8SOURCE*2  
DISPLAY*3  
b q/w/e/r, ENTER  
f
MUTING  
PLAYLIST e/r  
g
e
ALBUM +/–  
c 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,  
h
7, 6  
i VOL q/w  
REPEAT  
MENU  
MODE*4  
d
j
k
f
g
h
RANDOM  
• With some iPod/iPhone models, generations and RI Docks,  
certain buttons may not work as expected.  
RI Dock  
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to “HDD” or  
“HDD/DOCK”.  
• For detailed operation of iPod/iPhone, please refer to the  
i
*1  
TOP MENU works as the mode button when used with  
8SOURCE may not work with a remote control  
code (without u). In this case, make an u  
connection and enter the remote control code 81993  
(with u).  
the DS-A2 RI Dock.  
This button does not turn the Onkyo DS-A2 or DS-A2X  
a
b
j
*2  
RI Dock on or off. Also, your iPod/iPhone may not  
respond the first time you press this button, in which case  
you should press it again. This is because the remote  
controller transmits the On and Standby commands  
alternately, so if your iPod/iPhone is already on, it will  
remain on when the remote controller transmits the On  
command. Similarly, if your iPod/iPhone is already off, it  
will remain off when the remote controller transmits the  
Off command.  
With the RI Control  
Make an uconnection and enter the remote control  
code 81993 (with u).  
c
d
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to “DOCK”  
(page 39).  
k
*3  
DISPLAY turns on the backlight for a few seconds.  
Resume mode  
Without the RI Control  
*4  
You must enter the remote control code 82990 first  
(page 58).  
With the Resume function, you can resume playback of  
the song that was playing when you removed your  
iPod/iPhone from the Onkyo DS-A2 RI Dock.  
En-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Appendix  
seconds). Within 30 seconds, press RECEIVER  
again.  
The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is  
connected to the HDMI OUT.  
Audio  
Troubleshooting  
There’s no sound, or it’s very quiet  
Make sure that the digital input source is selected properly.  
(page 46)  
If you have any trouble using the AV receiver, look for  
a solution in this section. If you can’t resolve the issue  
yourself, contact your Onkyo dealer.  
Make sure that all audio connecting plugs are pushed in all  
the way. (page 14)  
Power  
Resetting the AV receiver  
Make sure that the inputs and outputs of all components  
are connected properly. (pages 14 to 19)  
Can’t turn on the AV receiver  
Make sure that the power cord is properly plugged into the  
wall outlet.  
If you can’t resolve the issue yourself, try resetting the  
AV receiver before contacting your Onkyo dealer.  
To reset the AV receiver to its factory defaults, turn it  
on and, while holding down CBL/SAT, press  
8ON/STANDBY. “Clear” will appear on the AV  
receiver’s display and the AV receiver will enter  
standby mode.  
Make sure that the polarity of the speaker cables is correct,  
and that the bare wires are in contact with the metal part of  
each speaker terminal. (page 12)  
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait five  
seconds or more, then plug it in again.  
Make sure that the input source is properly selected.  
(page 24)  
The AV receiver turns off unexpectedly  
The AV receiver will automatically enter standby mode  
when Auto Standby has been set and launches.  
(page 52)  
Make sure that the speaker cables are not shorting.  
(page 13)  
Check the volume. The AV receiver is designed for home  
theater enjoyment. It has a wide volume range, allowing  
precise adjustment.  
The AV receiver turns off and after restoring the  
power, it turns off again  
If the MUTING indicator is flashing on the AV receiver’s  
display, press the remote controller’s MUTING button to  
unmute the AV receiver. (page 39)  
The protection circuit has been activated. Remove the  
power cord from the wall outlet immediately. Make sure  
that all speaker cables and input sources are properly  
connected, and leave the AV receiver with its power cord  
disconnected for 1 hour. After that, reconnect the power  
cord and turn the power on. If the AV receiver turns off  
again, avoid resetting it and unplug the power cord. Then  
contact your Onkyo dealer. (page 13)  
Note that resetting the AV receiver will delete your  
radio presets and custom settings.  
While a pair of headphones is connected to the PHONES  
jack, no sound is output from the speakers. (page 19)  
If there’s no sound from a DVD player connected to an HDMI  
IN, check the DVD player’s output settings, and be sure to  
select a supported audio format.  
Remote indicator  
Check the digital audio output setting on the connected  
device. On some game consoles, such as those that support  
DVD, the default setting is off.  
Caution:  
• If “CHECK SP WIRE” appears on the AV receiver’s  
display, the speaker cables may be shorting.  
With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an audio  
output format from a menu.  
RECEIVER  
If your turntable uses an MC cartridge, you must connect  
an MC head amp, or an MC transformer.  
WARNING:  
• If smoke, smell or abnormal noise is produced by the AV  
receiver, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet  
immediately and contact your Onkyo dealer.  
Make sure that none of the connecting cables are bent,  
twisted, or damaged.  
HOME  
Not all listening modes use all speakers. (page 35)  
Specify the speaker distances and adjust the individual  
speaker levels. (pages 47, 48)  
To reset the remote controller to its factory defaults,  
while holding down RECEIVER, press and hold down  
HOME until the remote indicator lights (about 3  
Make sure that the speaker setup microphone is not still  
connected.  
En-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Appendix  
If the input signal format is set to “PCM” or “DTS”. Set it to  
Depending on the input signal, some listening modes  
cannot be selected. (pages 35 to 38)  
With some CD and LD players, you won’t be able to  
Off”. (page 51)  
playback DTS material properly even though your player is  
connected to a digital input on the AV receiver. This is  
usually because the DTS bitstream has been processed  
(e.g., output level, sampling rate, or frequency response  
changed) and the AV receiver doesn’t recognize it as a  
genuine DTS signal. In such cases, you may hear noise.  
Only the front speakers produce sound  
Can’t select the Pure Audio listening mode  
When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected, only  
the front speakers and subwoofer produce sound.  
(page 37)  
(European, Australian and Asian models) The Pure  
Audio listening mode cannot be selected while Zone 2 is  
on.  
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.  
(page 46)  
Playing DTS program material, using the pause, fast  
forward, or fast reverse function on your player may  
produce a short audible noise. This is not a malfunction.  
Can’t get 5.1 playback  
Depending on the number of connected speakers, it is not  
always possible to select all of the listening modes.  
(pages 35 to 38)  
Only the center speaker produces sound  
If you use the Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic II  
Music, or Dolby Pro Logic II Game listening mode with a  
mono source, such as an AM radio station or mono TV  
program, the sound is concentrated in the center speaker.  
The beginning of audio received by an HDMI IN  
can’t be heard  
Since it takes longer to identify the format of an HDMI  
signal than it does for other digital audio signals, audio  
output may not start immediately.  
The speaker volume cannot be set as required  
After the volume level of each individual speaker has been  
adjusted, the maximum volume may be reduced.  
(page 48)  
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.  
(page 46)  
If the volume level of each individual speaker has been  
adjusted to high positive values, then the maximum master  
volume possible may be reduced. Note that the individual  
speaker volume levels are set automatically after the  
Audyssey MultEQ® Room Correction and Speaker Setup  
has been performed. (pages 21, 48)  
The surround speakers produce no sound  
Video  
When the T-D (Theater-Dimensional), Stereo or Mono  
listening mode is selected, the surround speakers produce  
no sound.  
There’s no picture  
Make sure that all video connecting plugs are pushed in all  
the way. (page 17)  
Depending on the source and current listening mode, not  
much sound may be produced by the surround speakers.  
Try selecting another listening mode. (page 35)  
Make sure that each video component is properly  
connected. (page 14)  
Noise can be heard  
Using cable ties to bundle audio cables with power cords,  
speaker cables, and the like may degrade the audio  
performance, so refrain from doing it.  
If the video source is connected to a component video  
input, you must assign that input to an input selector, and  
your TV must be connected to COMPONENT VIDEO OUT.  
(pages 14, 46)  
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.  
(page 46)  
An audio cable may be picking up interference. Try  
repositioning your cables.  
The center speaker produces no sound  
When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected, the  
center speaker produces no sound.  
If the video source is connected to a composite video input,  
your TV must be connected to the corresponding  
composite video output. (page 14)  
The Late Night function doesn’t work  
Make sure the source material is Dolby Digital, Dolby  
Digital Plus, and Dolby TrueHD. (page 43)  
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.  
(page 46)  
If the video source is connected to an HDMI input, you  
must assign that input to an input selector, and your TV  
must be connected to the HDMI OUT. (pages 14, 45)  
The subwoofer produces no sound  
When you play source material that contains no information  
in the LFE channel, the subwoofer produces no sound.  
About DTS signals  
When DTS program material ends and the DTS bitstream  
stops, the AV receiver remains in DTS listening mode and  
the dts indicator remains on. This is to prevent noise when  
you use the pause, fast forward, or fast reverse function on  
your player. If you switch your player from DTS to PCM,  
you may not hear any sound because the AV receiver does  
not switch formats immediately. In such case, you should  
stop your player for about three seconds and then resume  
playback.  
(European, Australian and Asian models) While the  
Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the analog video  
circuitry is turned off and only video signals input through  
HDMI IN can be output. (page 35)  
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.  
(page 46)  
There’s no sound with a certain signal format  
On your TV, make sure that the video input to which the AV  
receiver is connected is selected.  
Check the digital audio output setting on the connected  
device. On some game consoles, such as those that  
support DVD, the default setting is off.  
output format from a menu.  
En-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
There’s no picture from a source connected to  
an HDMI IN  
Reliable operation with an HDMI-to-DVI adapter is not  
guaranteed. In addition, video signals from a PC are not  
guaranteed. (page 71)  
If the AV receiver is installed in a rack or cabinet with  
colored-glass doors, the remote controller may not work  
reliably when the doors are closed.  
Make sure your iPod/iPhone is properly inserted in the  
Dock.  
Make sure the AV receiver is turned on, the correct input source  
is selected, and the volume is turned up.  
Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote controller  
mode. (pages 10, 58)  
Make sure the plugs are pushed in all the way.  
Try resetting your iPod/iPhone.  
When using the remote controller to control other  
manufacturers’ AV components, some buttons may not  
The on-screen menus don’t appear  
On your TV, make sure that the video input to which the AV  
receiver is connected is selected.  
There’s no video  
Make sure that your iPod/iPhone model’s TV OUT setting  
is set to On.  
Make sure you’ve entered the correct remote control code.  
(page 57)  
When the AV receiver is not connected to a TV via HDMI  
OUT, on-screen menus are not displayed.  
Make sure the correct input is selected on your TV or the  
AV receiver.  
Make sure to set the same ID on both the AV receiver and  
remote controller. (page 51)  
Tuner  
Some versions of the iPod/iPhone do not output video.  
Can’t control other components  
Reception is noisy, FM stereo reception is noisy,  
or the FM STEREO indicator doesn’t light  
Relocate your antenna.  
The AV receiver’s remote controller doesn’t  
control my iPod/iPhone  
Make sure your iPod/iPhone is properly inserted in the  
Dock. If your iPod/iPhone is in a case, it may not connect  
properly to the Dock. Always remove your iPod/iPhone  
from the case before inserting it into the Dock.  
If it’s an Onkyo component, make sure that the ucable  
and analog audio cable are connected properly.  
Connecting only an ucable won’t be enough.  
(page 19)  
Move the AV receiver away from your TV or computer.  
Listen to the station in mono. (page 32)  
Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote controller  
mode. (pages 10, 58)  
When listening to an AM station, operating the remote  
controller may cause noise.  
the VIDEO/AUDIO IN jacks, for the remote controller to  
work properly, you must set the input display appropriately.  
(page 39)  
The iPod/iPhone cannot be operated while it’s displaying  
the Apple logo.  
Passing cars and airplanes can cause interference.  
Concrete walls weaken radio signals.  
Make sure you’ve selected the right remote mode.  
(page 62)  
If you cannot operate it, you will need to enter the  
appropriate remote control code. (page 57)  
If nothing improves the reception, install an outdoor  
antenna.  
When you use the AV receiver’s remote controller, point it  
toward your AV receiver.  
To control another manufacturer’s component, point the  
remote controller at that component. (page 57)  
If you still can’t control your iPod/iPhone, start playback by  
pressing your iPod/iPhone model’s Play button. Remote  
operation should then be possible.  
Remote Controller  
To control an Onkyo component that’s connected via u,  
point the remote controller at the AV receiver. Be sure to  
enter the appropriate remote control code first.  
(page 58)  
The remote controller doesn’t work  
Before operating this unit, be sure to press RECEIVER.  
Try resetting your iPod/iPhone.  
Depending on your iPod/iPhone, some buttons may not  
work as expected.  
Make sure that the batteries are installed with the correct  
polarity. (page 10)  
To control an Onkyo component that’s not connected via  
u, point the remote controller at the component. Be sure  
to enter the appropriate remote control code first.  
(page 58)  
The AV receiver unexpectedly selects my  
iPod/iPhone as the input source  
Always pause iPod/iPhone playback before selecting a  
different input source. If playback is not paused, the Direct  
Change function may select your iPod/iPhone as the input  
source by mistake during the transition between tracks.  
Install new batteries. Don’t mix different types of batteries,  
or old and new batteries. (page 10)  
Make sure that the remote controller is not too far away  
from the AV receiver, and that there’s no obstruction  
between the remote controller and the AV receiver’s  
remote control sensor. (page 10)  
The entered remote control code may not be correct. If more  
than one code is listed, try each one.  
RI Dock for iPod/iPhone  
iPod/iPhone doesn’t work properly  
Try reconnecting your iPod/iPhone.  
Make sure that the AV receiver is not subjected to direct  
sunshine or inverter-type fluorescent lights. Relocate if  
necessary.  
There’s no sound  
Make sure your iPod/iPhone is actually playing.  
En-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
How do I change the language of a multiplex  
Zone 2  
USB Device Playback  
source  
Use the “Input Ch (Mux)” setting in the “Audio Adjust”  
menu to select “Main” or “Sub”. (page 48)  
There’s no sound  
Audio can be output only when analog, NET or USB input  
Can’t access the music files on a USB device  
Make sure the USB device is plugged in properly.  
source is selected in Zone 2.  
The AV receiver supports USB devices that support the  
USB mass storage device class. However, playback may  
not be possible with some USB devices even if they  
conform to the USB mass storage device class.  
(page 72)  
The ufunctions don’t work  
To use u, you must make an uconnection and an  
analog audio connection (RCA) between the component  
and AV receiver, even if they are connected digitally.  
(page 19)  
Music Server and Internet Radio  
Can’t access the server or Internet radio  
Depending on the type of format, the playback from a USB  
device may not be performed normally. Check the type of  
the file formats that is supported. (page 73)  
Certain network service or contents available through this  
device may not be accessible in case the service provider  
terminates its service.  
While Zone 2 is selected, the ufunctions don’t work.  
(page 19)  
USB memory devices with security functions cannot be  
played.  
The functions System On/Auto Power On and  
Direct Change don’t work for components  
Check the network connection between the AV receiver  
and your router or switch. (page 15)  
Make sure that your modem and router are properly  
connected, and make sure they are both turned on.  
These functions don’t work when Zone 2 is turned on.  
Make sure the server is up and running and compatible  
with the AV receiver. (page 72)  
(page 19)  
Standby power consumption  
When performing Automatic Speaker Setup, the  
measurement fails and the message “Ambient  
noise is too high.” is displayed.  
In the following cases, the power consumption in standby  
mode may reach up to a maximum of 5 W:  
The “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” setting is set to “On”.  
(Depending on the TV status, the AV receiver will enter  
standby mode as usual.)  
Check the “11. Network Setup”. (page 54)  
Playback stops while listening to music files on  
the server  
Make sure your server is compatible with the AV receiver.  
This can be caused by a malfunction in your speaker unit.  
Check if the unit produces normal sounds.  
The “HDMI Through” setting is set to other than “Off”.  
The “Network Standby” setting is set to “On”.  
(pages 52, 53, 55)  
(page 72)  
The following settings can be made for the  
composite video inputs  
You must use the buttons on the unit to make these  
settings.  
On the AV receiver, press the input selector for the  
input source that you want to set and the HOME  
button simultaneously. While holding down the  
input selector button, press HOME until “Video  
ATT :On” appears on the AV receiver’s display.  
Then, release both buttons. To turn the setting off,  
repeat the above process so that “Video ATT :Off”  
appears on the AV receiver’s display, and release  
the buttons.  
If you download or copy large files on your computer,  
playback may be interrupted. Try closing any unused  
programs, use a more powerful computer, or use a  
dedicated server.  
The sound changes when I connect my  
headphones  
When a pair of headphones is connected, the listening  
mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,  
Mono, Direct, or Pure Audio (European, Australian and  
Asian models).  
If the server is serving large music files to several  
networked devices simultaneously, the network may  
become overloaded and playback may be interrupted.  
Reduce the number of playback devices on the network,  
upgrade your network, or use a switch instead of a hub.  
The speaker distance cannot be set as required  
The values entered may be automatically adjusted with  
values best-suited for your home theater.  
Can’t connect to the AV receiver from a Web  
browser  
If you’re using DHCP, your router may not always allocate  
the same IP address to the AV receiver, so if you find that  
you can’t connect to a server or Internet radio station,  
recheck the AV receiver’s IP address on the “Network  
Setup” screen. (page 54)  
The display doesn’t work  
The display is turned off when the Pure Audio (European,  
Australian and Asian models) listening mode is selected.  
Check the “11. Network Setup”. (page 54)  
En-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
• Video Attenuation  
DISCLAIMER  
Company makes no representation or warranty of any  
kind, express or implied, about the completeness,  
accuracy, validity, legality, reliability, suitability or  
availability with respect to the information, content or  
services available through this device. Company shall  
not be liable, whether in contract or tort, including  
negligence and strict liability, for any direct, indirect,  
special, incidental or consequential damages or any  
other damages arising out of, or in connection with,  
any information contained in, or as a result of the use  
of any content or service by you or any third party,  
even if Company has been advised of the possibility  
of such damages, nor shall Company be liable for any  
third party claims against users of this device or any  
third party.  
In no event shall Company be responsible nor liable  
for, without limiting the generality of the foregoing,  
any interruption or suspension of any information,  
content or service available through this device.  
Company is neither responsible nor liable for  
customer service related to the information, content  
and services available through this device.  
This setting can be made for the BD/DVD,  
CBL/SAT, GAME, PC, AUX or USB input.  
If you have a game console connected to the  
composite video input, and the picture isn’t very  
clear, you can attenuate the gain.  
Video ATT :Off: (default).  
Video ATT :On: Gain is reduced by 2 dB.  
Through this device you are able to link to other  
services or websites which are not under the control  
of any company which has designed, manufactured  
or distributed/have distributed this device, and its  
affiliates (collectively, “Company”). We have no  
control over the nature, content and availability of  
those services. The inclusion of any links does not  
necessarily imply a recommendation or endorse the  
views expressed within them.  
All information, content and services available  
through this device belong to third parties and are  
protected by copyright, patent, trademark and/or  
other intellectual property laws of applicable  
countries. The information, content and services  
provided through this device are for your personal,  
noncommercial use only. Any information, content or  
services may not be used in any manner other than  
previously approved by the appropriate content  
owner or service provider.  
You may not modify, copy, republish, translate,  
exploit, create derivative works, upload, post,  
transmit, sell or distribute in any manner any  
information, content or services available through this  
device, unless expressly permitted by the appropriate  
copyright, patent, trademark and/or other intellectual  
property owner, including, without limitation, content  
owner or service provider.  
THE CONTENT AND SERVICES AVAILABLE  
THROUGH THIS DEVICE ARE PROVIDED “AS IS”.  
COMPANY DOES NOT WARRANT INFORMATION,  
CONTENT OR SERVICES SO PROVIDED, EITHER  
EXPRESSLY OR IMPLIEDLY, FOR ANY PURPOSE.  
COMPANY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY  
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,  
If the picture on your TV/monitor connected to  
the HDMI OUT is unstable, try switching the  
DeepColor function off  
To turn off the DeepColor function, simultaneously  
press the GAME and 8ON/STANDBY buttons on  
the AV receiver. While holding down GAME, press  
8ON/STANDBY until “Deep Color:Off” appears  
on the AV receiver’s display. Then, release both  
buttons. To reactivate the DeepColor function,  
repeat the above process until “Deep Color:On”  
appears on the AV receiver’s display and release  
the buttons.  
Any question or request for service relating to the  
information, content or services should be made  
directly to the appropriate content owners and  
services providers.  
The AV receiver contains a microcomputer for  
signal processing and control functions. In very rare  
situations, severe interference, noise from an  
external source, or static electricity may cause it to  
lockup. In the unlikely event that this happens,  
unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait at  
least five seconds, and then plug it back in.  
Onkyo is not responsible for damages (such as CD  
rental fees) due to unsuccessful recordings caused  
by the unit’s malfunction. Before you record  
important data, make sure that the material will be  
recorded correctly.  
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES  
OF TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT,  
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  
Before disconnecting the power cord from the wall  
outlet, set the AV receiver to standby.  
En-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Before Starting  
Limitation of liability  
The program and accompanying online  
Firmware Update  
• Set the “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” setting to “Off”  
(page 52).  
• Turn off the controller device connected via network.  
• Turn off Multi Zone if this function is present.  
• Stop playback of contents from Internet Radio,  
iPod/iPhone, USB or servers, etc.  
To update the firmware of the AV receiver, you can  
choose from the following two methods: update via  
network, or update via USB storage. Choose the one  
that best suits your environment. Before proceeding  
with the update, please read the corresponding  
explanations carefully.  
documentation are furnished to you for use at your  
own risk. Onkyo will not be liable and you will have  
no remedy for damages for any claim of any kind  
whatsoever concerning your use of the program or  
the accompanying online documentation,  
regardless of legal theory, and whether arising in  
tort or contract. In no event will Onkyo be liable to  
you or any third party for any special, indirect,  
incidental, or consequential damages of any kind,  
including, but not limited to, compensation,  
reimbursement or damages on account of the loss  
of present or prospective profits, loss of data, or for  
any other reason whatsoever.  
Update via network  
You need a wired Internet connection to update the  
firmware.  
Update Procedure  
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME on the  
remote controller.  
1
Update via USB storage (page 69)  
Please prepare a USB storage device such as a  
USB flash memory stick. You need at least 32 MB  
of available space to update the firmware.  
The Home menu appears on the TV screen.  
Select “F/W Update” and press ENTER.  
2
Note that the “F/W Update” option will be grayed  
out for a short while after the AV receiver is  
turned on. Please wait until it becomes operable.  
See the Onkyo web site for latest information.  
Note  
• Check the network connection before updating.  
• Do not touch any cable or device connected to the AV  
receiver during the update process.  
• Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC  
while it is being updated.  
• Do not shutdown the power of the AV receiver while it is  
being updated.  
• The storage media in the USB card reader may not work.  
• If the USB device is partitioned, each section will be treated  
as an independent device.  
• If the USB device contains a lot of data, the AV receiver  
may take a while to read it.  
• Operation is not guaranteed for all USB devices, which  
includes the ability to power them.  
• Onkyo takes no responsibility whatsoever for the loss or  
damage of data resulting from the use of a USB device with  
the AV receiver. Onkyo recommends that you back up your  
important music files beforehand.  
• If you connect a USB hard disk drive to the USB port,  
Onkyo recommends that you use its AC adapter to power it.  
• USB hubs and USB devices with hub functions are not  
supported. Do not connect your USB device via a USB hub.  
• USB devices with security functions are not supported.  
Updating the Firmware via Network  
Select “Update via NET” and press ENTER.  
3
The AV receiver allows you to update the firmware using  
network connection on the rear panel.  
Note that this option will not be available if there  
is no firmware file newer than the currently  
installed version. If the AV receiver is not  
connected to the internet, “Update via NET” is  
not displayed.  
Note  
• Make sure your AV receiver and TV are turned on and an  
Ethernet cable is connected to the rear panel of the AV  
receiver.  
• Never unplug or turn off the AV receiver while it is being  
updated.  
• Never plug or unplug an HDMI or Ethernet cable during the  
update process.  
• Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC  
while it is being updated.  
• Never unplug the power cord during the update process.  
• It takes up to 10 minutes to complete the firmware update.  
• The AV receiver will retain all your settings after the update  
is finished.  
Select “Update” and press ENTER.  
The update process will begin.  
4
During the update process, the on-screen display  
may disappear depending on the updated  
program. When this occurs, you can still view the  
update progress on the AV receiver’s display.  
The on-screen display will reappear after the  
update is complete, and upon turning the AV  
receiver off and on again.  
The message “Completed!” appears on the AV  
receiver’s display, indicating that the update  
has been completed.  
5
Operating  
procedure  
(page 44)  
En-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix  
Errors during an update via network  
Press 8ON/STANDBY on the front panel.  
Updating the Firmware via USB  
6
The AV receiver will enter standby mode.  
Error Code  
Description  
The AV receiver allows you to update the firmware  
using a USB device.  
*-01, *-10  
The Ethernet cable was not detected.  
Reconnect the cable properly.  
Do not use 8RECEIVER on the remote  
controller.  
*-02, *-03,  
*-04, *-05,  
*-06, *-11,  
*-13, *-14,  
*-16, *-17,  
*-18, *-20,  
*-21  
Internet connection error.  
Check the following items:  
Note  
The AV receiver will enter standby mode  
automatically in 3 minutes regardless of whether  
8ON/STANDBY is pressed.  
• Never unplug or turn off the AV receiver during the update  
process.  
Never plug or unplug an HDMI cable or a USB device  
during the update process.  
• Never unplug the USB storage device containing the  
firmware file or the AC power cord during the update  
process.  
• Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC  
while it is being updated.  
• Make sure the IP address, subnet mask,  
gateway address, and DNS server are  
configured properly.  
• Make sure the router is turned on.  
• Make sure the AV receiver and the router  
are connected with an Ethernet cable.  
• Make sure your router is configured  
properly. See the instruction manual of  
the router.  
Congratulations! You now have the latest  
firmware installed on your Onkyo AV receiver.  
Troubleshooting  
Case 1:  
If an error occurs, “Error!! *-**” is displayed on the AV  
receiver’s display. (Alpha-numeric characters on the  
front display are denoted by asterisks.) Refer to the  
following table and take appropriate action.  
It takes up to 10 minutes to complete the firmware update.  
• The AV receiver will retain all your settings after the update  
is finished.  
• If your network allows only one client  
connection and there is any other device  
already connected, the AV receiver will  
not be able to access the network.  
Consult your Internet Service Provider  
(ISP).  
• If your modem does not function as a  
router, you will need a router. Depending  
on your network, you may need to  
configure the proxy server if necessary.  
See the document provided by your ISP.  
If you are still unable to access the  
Internet, the DNS or proxy server may be  
temporarily down. Contact your ISP.  
Before Starting  
• Set the “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” setting to “Off”  
(page 52).  
• Turn off the controller device connected via network.  
• Turn off Multi Zone if this function is present.  
• Stop playback of contents from Internet Radio,  
iPod/iPhone, USB or servers, etc.  
• If there is any data in the USB device, remove it first.  
Others  
Retry the update procedure from the  
beginning. If the error persists, please  
contact Onkyo Suport and provide the  
error code.  
Case 2:  
If an error occurs during the update process,  
disconnect then reconnect the AC power cord and try  
again.  
Case 3:  
If you do not have an Internet connection to the  
network, please contact Onkyo Support.  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 44)  
En-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix  
Update Procedure  
Troubleshooting  
Case 1:  
If an error occurs, “Error!! *-**” is displayed on the AV  
receiver’s display. (Alpha-numeric characters on the  
front display are denoted by asterisks.) Refer to the  
following table and take appropriate action.  
Select “Update via USB” and press ENTER.  
Note that this option will not be available if there  
is no firmware file newer than the currently  
installed version. If the AV receiver is not  
connected to the internet, “Update via USB” is  
not displayed.  
9
Connect a USB device to your PC. If there is  
any data in the USB device, remove it first.  
1
Download the firmware file from the Onkyo  
web site. The file name is as follows:  
2
Select “Update” and press ENTER.  
The update process will begin.  
ONKAVR****_************.zip  
10  
Unzip the downloaded file. The numbers of  
folders and files differ according to the model.  
Error Code  
Description  
During the update process, the on-screen display  
may disappear depending on the updated  
program. When this occurs, you can still view the  
update progress on the AV receiver’s display.  
The on-screen display will reappear after the  
update is complete, and upon turning the AV  
receiver off and on again.  
Do not turn off the AV receiver and do not  
remove the USB device during the update  
process.  
*-01, *-10  
The USB device was not detected. Make  
sure the USB flash memory or USB cable is  
properly connected to the USB port. If the  
USB storage device has its own power  
supply, use it to power the USB device.  
Copy all the extracted folders including all  
folders and files to the root folder of the USB  
device. Be careful not to copy the zip file.  
3
Remove the USB device from your PC and  
*-05, *-13,  
*-20, *-21  
The firmware file was not found in the root  
folder of the USB device, or the firmware  
file is for another model. Retry and  
download the file on the support page of  
the web site, following the on-site  
instructions. If the error persists, please  
contact Onkyo Support and provide the  
error code.  
4
connect it to the USB port on the AV receiver.  
When the AV receiver has two USB ports, you  
can use either one.  
Make sure the AV receiver and TV are turned  
on.  
5
The message “Completed!” appears on the AV  
receiver’s display, indicating that the update  
has been completed.  
11  
12  
If the AV receiver is in standby mode, press  
8ON/STANDBY on the AV receiver to light up  
the front display.  
Others  
Retry the update procedure from the  
beginning. If the error persists, please  
contact Onkyo Support and provide the  
error code.  
Remove the USB device.  
Press 8ON/STANDBY on the front panel.  
Select the USB input source.  
6
The AV receiver will enter standby mode.  
Now Initializing...” appears on the AV receiver’s  
display and then the name of the USB device is  
displayed. It takes 20 to 30 seconds to recognize  
the USB device.  
Case 2:  
Do not use 8RECEIVER on the remote  
If an error occurs during the update process,  
disconnect then reconnect the AC power cord and try  
again.  
controller.  
The AV receiver will enter standby mode  
automatically in 3 minutes regardless of whether  
8ON/STANDBY is pressed.  
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME on the  
remote controller.  
The Home menu appears on the TV screen.  
7
8
Congratulations! You now have the latest  
firmware installed on your Onkyo AV receiver.  
Select “F/W Update” and press ENTER.  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 44)  
En-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Supported Audio Formats  
About Copyright Protection  
About HDMI  
• 2-channel linear PCM (32–192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit)  
• Multichannel linear PCM (up to 7.1 ch, 32–192 kHz,  
16/20/24 bit)  
• Bitstream (DSD, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus,  
Dolby TrueHD, DTS, DTS-HD High Resolution  
Audio, DTS-HD Master Audio)  
The AV receiver supports HDCP (High-bandwidth  
Designed to meet the increased demands of digital  
TV, HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a  
new digital interface standard for connecting TVs,  
projectors, Blu-ray Disc players/DVD players, set-top  
boxes, and other video components. Until now,  
several separate video and audio cables have been  
required to connect AV components. With HDMI, a  
single cable can carry control signals, digital video,  
and up to eight channels of digital audio (2-channel  
PCM, multichannel digital audio, and multichannel  
PCM).  
*2  
Digital Content Protection) , a copy-protection  
system for digital video signals. Other devices  
connected to the AV receiver via HDMI must also  
support HDCP.  
Your Blu-ray Disc player/DVD player must also  
support HDMI output of the above audio formats.  
*1  
DVI (Digital Visual Interface): The digital display interface  
standard set by the DDWG*3 in 1999.  
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection): The  
*2  
video encryption technology developed by Intel for  
HDMI/DVI. It’s designed to protect video content and  
requires a HDCP-compatible device to display the  
encrypted video.  
The HDMI video stream (i.e., video signal) is  
compatible with DVI (Digital Visual Interface) , so  
TVs and displays with a DVI input can be connected  
by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable. (This may  
not work with some TVs and displays, resulting in no  
picture.)  
*1  
*3  
DDWG (Digital Display Working Group): Lead by Intel,  
Compaq, Fujitsu, Hewlett Packard, IBM, NEC, and  
Silicon Image, this open industry group’s objective is to  
address the industry’s requirements for a digital  
connectivity specification for high-performance PCs and  
digital displays.  
The AV receiver uses HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital  
*2  
Content Protection) , so only HDCP-compatible  
components can display the picture.  
Note  
The AV receiver’s HDMI interface is based on the  
following:  
• The HDMI video stream is compatible with DVI (Digital  
Visual Interface), so TVs and displays with a DVI input can  
be connected by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable.  
(Note that DVI connections only carry video, so you’ll need  
to make a separate connection for audio.) However,  
reliable operation with such an adapter is not guaranteed.  
In addition, video signals from a PC are not supported.  
• The HDMI audio signal (sampling rate, bit length, etc.) may  
be restricted by the connected source component. If the  
picture is poor or there’s no sound from a component  
connected via HDMI, check its setup. Refer to the  
Audio Return Channel, 3D, x.v.Color, DeepColor, Lip  
Sync, 4K Passthrough, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-  
HD High Resolution Audio, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby  
Digital Plus, DSD and Multichannel PCM.  
connected component’s instruction manual for details.  
En-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Appendix  
modem, etc). Please consult your ISP or computer  
dealer if you’re unsure.  
The setting varies depending on the media server or  
controller devices. Refer to your devices’ instruction  
manual for details.  
If the operating system of your personal computer is  
Windows 8/Windows 7, Windows Media Player 12 is  
already installed. For more information, see the  
Microsoft web site.  
Network/USB Features  
Note  
Network Requirements  
• To receive Internet radio with the AV receiver, your  
broadband Internet connection must be working and able to  
access the Web. Consult your ISP if you have any problems  
with your Internet connection.  
• The AV receiver uses DHCP to configure its network  
settings automatically. If you want to configure these  
settings manually, see “11. Network Setup” (page 54).  
• The AV receiver does not support PPPoE settings, so if you  
have a PPPoE-type Internet connection, you must use a  
PPPoE-compatible router.  
Ethernet Network  
For the best results, a 100Base-TX switched Ethernet  
network is recommended. Although it’s possible to  
play music on a computer that’s connected to the  
network wirelessly, playback may be unreliable, so it  
is recommended to use wired connections.  
USB Device Requirements  
• USB mass storage device class (but not always  
guaranteed).  
Ethernet Router  
• FAT16 or FAT32 file system format.  
• If the storage device has been partitioned, each  
section will be treated as an independent device.  
• Up to 20,000 folders can be displayed, and folders  
may be nested up to 16 levels deep.  
• USB hubs and USB devices with hub functions are  
not supported.  
A router manages the network, data-routing and  
supplying of IP addresses. Your router must support  
the following:  
• Depending on your ISP, you may need to specify a proxy  
server to use Internet radio. If your computer is configured  
to use a proxy server, use the same settings for the AV  
receiver (page 54).  
• NAT (Network Address Translation). NAT allows  
several networked computers to access the Internet  
simultaneously via a single Internet connection. The  
AV receiver needs Internet access for Internet radio.  
• DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol).  
DHCP supplies IP addresses to the network  
devices, allowing them to configure themselves  
automatically.  
Server Requirements  
Server playback  
Note  
The AV receiver can play digital music files stored on  
a computer or media server and supports the  
following technologies:  
• Windows Media Player 11  
• Windows Media Player 12  
• If the media you connect is not supported, the message “No  
Storage” will be displayed.  
• If you connect a USB hard disk drive to the AV receiver’s  
USB port, we recommend that you use its AC adapter to  
power it.  
• A router with a built-in 100Base-TX switch is  
recommended.  
• The AV receiver supports USB MP3 players that support  
the USB Mass Storage Class standard, which allows USB  
devices to be connected to computers without the need for  
special drivers or software. Note that not all USB MP3  
players support the USB Mass Storage Class standard.  
Refer to your USB MP3 player’s instruction manual for  
details.  
• Protected WMA music files on an MP3 player cannot be  
played.  
• Onkyo accepts no responsibility whatsoever for the loss or  
damage to data stored on a USB device when that device  
is used with the AV receiver. We recommend that you back  
up your important music files beforehand.  
Some routers have a built-in modem, and some  
Internet Service Providers (ISP) require you to use  
specific routers. Please consult your ISP or computer  
dealer if you’re unsure.  
• DLNA-certified media server  
• The computer or media server must be on the same  
network as the AV receiver.  
• Up to 20,000 folders can be displayed, and folders  
may be nested up to 16 levels deep.  
CAT5 Ethernet cable  
Use a shielded CAT5 Ethernet cable (straight-type) to  
connect the AV receiver to your home network.  
Note  
• Depending on the media server, the AV receiver may not  
recognize it, or may not be able to play its music files.  
Internet Access (for Internet radio)  
Remote playback  
To receive Internet radio, your Ethernet network must  
have Internet access. A narrowband Internet  
connection (e.g., 56K modem, ISDN) will not provide  
satisfactory results, so a broadband connection is  
strongly recommended (e.g., cable modem, xDSL  
• Windows Media Player 12  
• DLNA-certified (within DLNA Interoperability  
Guidelines version 1.5) media server or controller  
device.  
• MP3 players containing music files that are managed with  
special music software are not supported.  
En-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Appendix  
• Operation is not guaranteed for all USB devices, which  
includes the ability to power them.  
• Do not connect your USB device via a USB hub. The USB  
device must be connected directly to the AV receiver’s USB  
port.  
• If the USB device contains a lot of data, the AV receiver  
make take a while to read it.  
• USB devices with security functions cannot be played.  
WMA Lossless (.wma or .WMA)  
• Sampling rates of 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz,  
96 kHz are supported.  
LPCM (Linear PCM)  
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,  
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,  
48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz and 96 kHz are  
supported.  
• Quantization bit: 16 bit, 24 bit  
WAV (.wav or .WAV)  
• Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit  
WAV files contain uncompressed PCM digital audio.  
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,  
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,  
48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz and  
192 kHz are supported.  
*
Only for playback via network.  
Apple Lossless (.m4a/.mp4/.M4A/.MP4)  
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,  
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,  
48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz and 96 kHz are  
supported.  
Supported Audio File Formats  
For server playback and playback from a USB device,  
the AV receiver supports the following music file  
formats.  
Variable bit-rate (VBR) files are supported. However,  
playback times may not display correctly.  
• Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit  
*
For playback from a USB (Rear) device, sampling rates of  
• Quantization bit: 16 bit, 24 bit  
176.4 kHz and 192 kHz are not supported.  
AAC  
(.aac/.m4a/.mp4/.3gp/.3g2/.AAC/.M4A/.MP4/  
.3GP or .3G2)  
• The sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz is supported.  
Note  
• With remote playback, the AV receiver does not support the  
following music file formats: FLAC, Ogg Vorbis, DSD and  
Dolby TrueHD.  
• In the case of server playback, the above-mentioned file  
formats may not be played depending on the server type.  
Dolby TrueHD (.vr/.mlp/.VR/.MLP)  
• Sampling rates of 48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz,  
96 kHz, 176.4 kHz and 192 kHz are supported.  
AAC stands for MPEG-2/MPEG-4 Audio.  
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,  
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,  
48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz and bitrates of  
between 8 kbps and 320 kbps are supported.  
*
For playback from a USB (Rear) device, sampling rates  
only of 48 kHz and 64 kHz are supported.  
MP3 (.mp3 or .MP3)  
• MP3 files must be MPEG-1/MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3  
format with sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz,  
12 kHz, 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz,  
44.1 kHz, 48 kHz and bitrates of between 8 kbps  
and 320 kbps. Incompatible files cannot be played.  
FLAC (.flac or .FLAC)  
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data  
compression.  
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,  
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,  
48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz and  
192 kHz are supported.  
About DLNA  
The Digital Living Network Alliance is an international,  
cross-industry collaboration. Members of DLNA  
develop a concept of wired and wireless interoperable  
networks where digital content such as photos,  
music, and videos can be shared through consumer  
electronics, personal computers, and mobile devices  
in and beyond the home. The AV receiver complies  
with the DLNA Interoperability Guidelines version 1.5.  
WMA (.wma or .WMA)  
WMA stands for Windows Media Audio and is an  
audio compression technology developed by  
Microsoft Corporation. Audio can be encoded in WMA  
• Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit  
Ogg Vorbis (.ogg or .OGG)  
®
format by using Windows Media Player.  
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,  
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,  
48 kHz and bitrates of between 48 kbps and  
500 kbps are supported. Incompatible files cannot  
be played.  
• WMA files must have the copyright option turned off.  
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,  
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,  
48 kHz, bitrates of between 5 kbps and 320 kbps,  
and WMA DRM are supported.  
• WMA Pro/Voice formats are not supported.  
En-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix  
Windows and the Windows logo are trademarks of the  
Microsoft group of companies.  
License and Trademark  
Information  
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.  
iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod shuffle, and  
iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the  
U.S. and other countries.  
“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an  
electronic accessory has been designed to connect  
specifically to iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been  
certified by the developer to meet Apple performance  
standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this  
device or its compliance with safety and regulatory  
standards.  
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos:  
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872;  
7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and  
worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the Symbol,  
& DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered  
trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS,  
Inc. All Rights Reserved.  
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or  
iPhone may affect wireless performance.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks  
of Dolby Laboratories.  
Apple TV is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the  
U.S. and other countries.  
Music Optimizer™ and “WRAT” are trademarks of Onkyo  
Corporation.  
Manufactured under license from  
Audyssey Laboratories™,Inc. U.S. and foreign patents  
pending. Audyssey MultEQ®, Audyssey Dynamic EQ® and  
Audyssey Dynamic Volume® are registered trademarks of  
Audyssey Laboratories,Inc.  
“The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia  
Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered  
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States  
and other countries.”  
“DLNA®, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED® are  
trademarks, service marks, or certification marks of the  
Digital Living Network Alliance.”  
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from  
Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.  
This product is protected by certain intellectual property  
rights of Microsoft. Use or distribution of such technology  
outside of this product is prohibited without a license from  
Microsoft.  
InstaPrevue and the InstaPrevue logo are trademarks or  
registered trademarks of Silicon Image, Inc. in the United  
States and other countries.  
En-74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix  
HDMI  
Video Section  
Specifications  
Amplifier Section  
Input  
Output  
Video Resolution  
Audio Format  
IN 1, IN 2, IN 3, IN 4, IN 5, IN 6  
OUT  
4K  
Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio,  
DVD-Audio, DSD  
3D, Audio Return Channel, DeepColor,  
x.v.Color, LipSync, CEC (RIHD),  
4K Passthrough  
Input Sensitivity/Output Level and Impedance  
1 Vp-p/75 (Component Y)  
0.7 Vp-p/75 (Component PB/CB,  
PR/CR)  
Rated Output Power  
All channels:  
1 Vp-p/75 (Composite)  
80 watts minimum continuous power  
Supported  
per channel, 8 ohm loads, 2 channels  
driven from 20 Hz to 20 kHz, with a  
maximum total harmonic distortion of  
0.7% (FTC)  
Component Video Frequency Response  
5 Hz - 100 MHz/+0 dB, –3 dB  
Video Inputs  
Tuner Section  
(North American)  
5 ch × 130 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch  
driven of 1% (IEC)  
(Others)  
Component  
Composite  
IN 1, IN 2  
BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, GAME, PC, AUX  
FM Tuning Frequency Range  
87.5 MHz - 107.9 MHz  
(North American and Taiwanese)  
87.5 MHz - 108.0 MHz, RDS (Others)  
Maximum Effective Output Power  
5 ch × 160 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch  
Video Outputs  
driven (JEITA)  
(Asian)  
AM Tuning Frequency Range  
522/530 kHz - 1611/1710 kHz  
Preset Channel  
Component  
Composite  
OUT  
MONITOR OUT  
*
Dynamic Power  
*
40  
IEC60268-Short-term maximum output power  
Audio Inputs  
Digital  
180 W (3 , Front)  
160 W (4 , Front)  
100 W (8 , Front)  
General  
Optical: 1  
Coaxial: 2  
BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, GAME, PC, TV/CD,  
AUX  
THD+N (Total Harmonic Distortion+Noise)  
Analog  
Power Supply  
AC 120 V, 60 Hz  
(North American and Taiwanese)  
AC 230 V, 50 Hz  
(European and Australian)  
AC 220 - 240 V, 50/60 Hz (Others)  
0.7% (20 Hz - 20 kHz, half power)  
60 (Front, 1 kHz, 8 )  
Damping Factor  
Audio Outputs  
Input Sensitivity and Impedance (Unbalance)  
200 mV/47 k(LINE)  
Rated RCA Output Level and Impedance  
200 mV/2.2 k(LINE OUT)  
Maximum RCA Output Level and Impedance  
2 V/2.2 k(LINE OUT)  
Frequency Response 5 Hz - 100 kHz/+1 dB, –3 dB  
(DSP bypass)  
Analog  
ZONE2 LINE OUT  
Subwoofer Pre Outputs  
Power Consumption 4.2 A (North American and Taiwanese)  
400 W (European and Australian)  
420 W (Others)  
2
No-sound Power Consumption  
Speaker Outputs  
Phones  
Main (L, R, C, SL, SR)  
1 (ø 6.3)  
60 W  
(North American, European, Australian  
and Taiwanese)  
Others  
60 W (230 V)  
Tone Control Characteristics  
65 W (240 V)  
10 dB, 30 Hz (BASS)  
10 dB, 20 kHz (TREBLE)  
Signal to Noise Ratio 100 dB (LINE, IHF-A)  
Speaker Impedance 6 - 16 Ω  
Setup Mic  
RI  
USB  
1
1
(Others)  
Stand-by Power Consumption  
1 (Front)/1 (Rear)  
1
0.1 W (North American and Taiwanese)  
0.2 W (Others)  
Ethernet  
Dimensions (W × H × D)  
Specifications and features are subject to change  
without notice.  
435 mm × 173.5 mm × 328 mm  
17-1/8" × 6-13/16" × 12-15/16"  
8.5 kg (18.7 lbs.)  
Weight  
(North American and Taiwanese)  
9.0 kg (19.8 lbs.) (Others)  
En-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN  
http://www.onkyo.com/  
The Americas  
18 Park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.  
For Dealer, Service, Order and all other Business Inquiries:  
Tel: 201-785-2600 Fax: 201-785-2650  
http://www.us.onkyo.com/  
For Product Support Team Only:  
1-800-229-1687  
http://www.us.onkyo.com/  
Europe  
Liegnitzerstrasse 6, 82194 Groebenzell, GERMANY  
Tel: +49-8142-4401-0 Fax: +49-8142-4208-213  
http://www.eu.onkyo.com/  
Unit 19, Building 6, Croxley Green Business Park, Hatters Lane, Watford, WD18 8YH, UK  
Tel: +44 (0)8712-00-19-96 Fax: +44 (0)8712-00-19-95  
China  
(Hong Kong)  
Unit 1033, 10/F, Star House, No 3, Salisbury Road, Tsim Sha Tsui Kowloon, Hong Kong.  
Tel: 852-2429-3118 Fax: 852-2428-9039  
http://www.hk.onkyo.com/  
(Mainland)  
1301, 555 Tower, No.555 West NanJing Road, Jing’an District, Shanghai, China 200041,  
Tel: 86-21-52131366 Fax: 86-21-52130396  
http://www.cn.onkyo.com/  
Asia, Oceania, Middle East, Africa  
Please contact an Onkyo distributor referring to Onkyo SUPPORT site.  
http://www.intl.onkyo.com/support/  
The above-mentioned information is subject to change without prior notice.  
Visit the Onkyo web site for the latest update.  
Y1303-3  
SN 29401399EN-B ꢀ  
(C) Copyright 2013 Onkyo Corporation Japan. All rights reserved.  
* 2 9 4 0 1 3 9 9 E N - B *  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using Internet Radio  
Using Multiple Accounts  
®
Using Internet Radio  
Pandora internet radio  
The AV receiver supports multiple user accounts,  
which means you can freely switch between several  
logins. After registering user accounts, login is  
performed from the “Users” screen.  
–Getting Started (U.S. only)..................... 2  
Common Procedures in Internet Radio  
Menu  
Using Rhapsody (U.S. only).......................... 3  
Note  
Press MENU while the Users screen is  
displayed.  
The following menu items appear:  
Add new user:  
Remove this user:  
1
• Available services may vary depending on the region.  
• Certain network service or contents available through this  
device may not be accessible in case the service provider  
terminates its service.  
Using the SiriusXM Internet Radio  
(North American only)..............................4  
You can either store a new user account, or  
delete an existing one.  
Press NET.  
1
Using Last.fm Internet Radio........................ 5  
Using Slacker Personal Radio...................... 6  
Using MP3tunes............................................. 7  
A list of the network services appears, and the  
NET indicator lights. If it flashes, verify that the  
Ethernet cable is firmly connected to the AV  
receiver.  
Tip  
• Some of the services don’t allow the use of multiple user  
accounts.  
• You can store up to 10 user accounts.  
• To switch between accounts you must first log out from the  
current account, and log in again on the “Users” screen.  
Select the desired service and press ENTER.  
The top page of the selected service appears.  
2
En-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using Internet Radio  
Delete this station:  
Pandora® internet radio  
–Getting Started (U.S. only)  
To play a station, use q/wto select the station  
from your station list, and then press ENTER.  
Playback starts and the playback screen  
appears.  
2
This will permanently delete a station from your  
Pandora account. All of your thumbs feedback  
will be lost should you choose to re-create the  
station with the same track or artist.  
Create station from this track:  
Creates a radio station from this track.  
Rename this station:  
Lets you rename the current radio station.  
Bookmark this artist:  
Pandora will bookmark your favorite artist for  
your profile on www.pandora.com.  
Bookmark this track:  
Pandora will bookmark the current track and  
allow you to buy them all from Amazon or iTunes  
in one step!  
Add to My Favorites:  
Adds a station to My Favorites list.  
Pandora is a free, personalized Internet radio service  
that plays the music you know and helps you discover  
music you’ll love.  
Create a New Station:  
Enter the name of a track, artist, or genre and  
Pandora will create a unique radio station for you  
based on the musical qualities of that track, artist,  
or genre.  
Use q/wto select “I have a Pandora Account”  
1
or “I’m new to Pandora” and then press  
ENTER.  
Menu Items  
I like this track:  
Give a track “thumbs-up” and Pandora will play  
more music like it.  
I don’t like this track:  
Give a track “thumbs-down” and Pandora will ban  
that track from the current station.  
Why is this track playing?:  
Discover some of the musical attributes that  
Pandora uses to create your personal radio  
stations.  
If you are new to Pandora select “I’m new to  
Pandora”. You will see an activation code on  
your TV screen. Please write down this code. Go  
to an Internet connected computer and point your  
browser to www.pandora.com/onkyo  
Enter your activation code and then follow the  
instructions to create your Pandora account and  
your personalized Pandora Internet radio  
stations. You can create your stations by entering  
your favorite tracks and artists when prompted.  
After you have created your account and stations  
you can return to your Onkyo receiver and press  
enter to begin listening to your personalized  
Pandora Internet radio.  
I’m tired of this track:  
PANDORA, the PANDORA logo, and the Pandora  
trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks  
of Pandora Media, Inc. Used with permission.  
If you are tired of a track, you can put the track to  
sleep and Pandora will not play it for one month.  
Create station from this artist:  
Creates a radio station from this artist.  
If you have an existing Pandora account, you can  
add your Pandora account to your Onkyo  
receiver by selecting “I have a Pandora  
Account” and logging in with your email and  
password.  
Tip  
Multiple Accounts” (page 1). Login can be made  
from the “Users” screen.  
En-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using Internet Radio  
Use q/wto select the menu, then press  
ENTER.  
Use q/wto select a channel, and press ENTER  
or 1to start playback.  
Using Rhapsody (U.S. only)  
2
3
Use q/wto select “Sign in to your account”  
Search:  
Playback starts and the playback screen  
appears.  
You can control the tracks with the buttons on the  
remote control.  
1
and then press ENTER.  
You can search for music by Artist, Album, or  
Track.  
To use Rhapsody, you need an account. If you  
don’t have one yet, you can create a new  
account at  
Music Guide:  
You can play tracks from Genres, Top Artists,  
Top Albums, Top Tracks, New Releases, and  
Staff Picks.  
Enabled buttons: 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, 7,  
www.rhapsody.com/onkyo  
6, RANDOM, REPEAT  
If you have an existing Rhapsody account, select  
Sign in to your account” and press ENTER.  
Enter your user name (usually your email) and  
password in the next keyboard screen, or in Web  
Setup.  
Note  
Rhapsody Channels:  
• On Rhapsody Channels, some of the buttons don’t  
work.  
Listen to radio channels programmed by  
Rhapsody’s top-notch editors.  
Playlists:  
Menu Items  
Add track to My Library:  
Bookmark currently-playing tracks.  
Add album to My Library:  
Bookmark currently-playing albums.  
Add playlist to My Library:  
Bookmark currently-playing playlists.  
Add channel to My Channels:  
Bookmark currently-playing Rhapsody radio  
channels.  
Play your own personal playlists.  
My Library:  
Bookmark your favorite albums and tracks from  
the Rhapsody catalog using My Library.  
Account Info:  
Confirm your account information.  
Sign Out:  
Sign out from your Rhapsody account.  
Using the keyboard screen  
1. Use q/w/e/rand ENTER to enter your user  
name and password.  
2. Select OK”.  
3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”  
screen appears.  
4. Press ENTER.  
Tip  
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using  
Multiple Accounts” (page 1). Login can be made  
from the “Users” screen.  
Add to My Favorites:  
Adds a track, channel or playlist to My Favorites  
list.  
Tip  
• You can remove bookmarked tracks, albums, and  
Rhapsody Channels from My Library.  
En-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using Internet Radio  
Use q/wto select “Sign In”, and then press  
ENTER.  
Use q/wto select the desired channel and then  
press ENTER.  
Using the SiriusXM Internet Radio  
(North American only)  
1
3
If you have an existing SIRIUS account, you can  
sign in by selecting “Sign In”. Enter your user  
name and password in the next keyboard screen,  
or in Web Setup. If you don’t know your  
username or password, call Sirius XM at (888)  
539-7474 for assistance.  
The playback screen for the selected channel  
appears and you can listen to SiriusXM Internet  
Radio.  
Your Onkyo AV receiver includes a free trial of  
SiriusXM Internet Radio. The “Account Info” screen  
shows how many days are left in your trial. After the  
trial period expires, if you want to continue listening to  
the service, you must subscribe. To subscribe go to  
www.siriusxm.com/internetradio with your  
computer.  
You can control the tracks with the buttons on the  
remote control.  
Enabled buttons: 2, 3, 7, 6  
Tip  
Menu Items  
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using  
Multiple Accounts” (page 1). Login can be made  
from the “Users” screen.  
Add to My Favorites:  
Adds a channel to My Favorites list.  
When you subscribe, you will be provided with a  
username and password which has to be entered into  
the AV receiver.  
Using the keyboard screen  
1. Use q/w/e/rand ENTER to enter your user  
name and password.  
2. Select OK”.  
3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”  
screen appears.  
To use SiriusXM Internet Radio, you must have your  
AV receiver connected to the Internet. Using the  
remote control, follow these steps:  
SiriusXM Internet Radio subscriptions are sold  
separately and are governed by the Sirius Terms and  
Conditions (see www.sirius.com). Be sure to read this  
agreement before you purchase your subscription.  
Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are  
trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its  
subsidiaries. All rights reserved.  
4. Press ENTER.  
Please wait...” appears and then “SiriusXM  
Internet Radio” screen appears which displays  
the category available for selection.  
Use q/wto select the category and then press  
2
ENTER.  
The channel list screen for the selected category  
appears.  
En-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using Internet Radio  
Profile:  
Use q/wto select “Sign in to your account”,  
and then press ENTER.  
Using Last.fm Internet Radio  
1
You can play tracks from “Recently Listened  
Tracks”, “Library” and “Neighbours”.  
Account Info:  
Confirm your account information.  
Sign Out:  
Last.fm is a music service that learns what you  
love...  
If you have the existing Last.fm account, you can  
sign in to your account to select “Sign in to your  
account”. Enter your user name and password in  
the next keyboard screen.  
Your new Onkyo AV receiver is very clever. If you  
have a free Last.fm account, it will keep track of all  
the songs you’ve just played. When you visit the  
Last.fm website, you can see personal charts of the  
music you’ve enjoyed, share them with friends and  
see what they like, too.  
It signs out from your account.  
Using the keyboard screen  
Use q/wto select a station, and press ENTER  
1. Use q/w/e/rand the ENTER to enter your  
user name and password.  
2. Select OK”.  
or 1 to start playback.  
Playback starts and the playback screen  
appears.  
3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”  
screen appears.  
With thousands of biographies, reviews and an  
endless choice of personalised, ad-free radio  
stations, Last.fm is a great way to discover music.  
Pick up your free Last.fm account today at  
www.last.fm/join  
Menu Items  
I Love this track:  
4. Press ENTER.  
Please wait...” appears and then “Last.fm  
Internet Radio” screen appears.  
Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and  
playback frequency increases.  
Ban this track:  
Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and  
playback frequency reduces.  
Add to My Favorites:  
Tip  
Get a subscription and you can enjoy the best of ad-  
free Last.fm Radio on your Onkyo AV receiver without  
a computer!  
Recommended Radio:  
Discover smart personalised recommendations that  
adapt as your tastes change.  
Artist Radio:  
Pick any artist and we’ll play you a whole station of  
music inspired by your choice.  
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using  
Multiple Accounts” (page 1). Login can be made  
from the “Users” screen.  
Use q/wto select menu and then press  
ENTER.  
Adds a station to My Favorites list.  
2
Using scrobbling control  
Search Station:  
You can search station by Artist, Tag, or User  
Name.  
Use q/wto select “Enable”, and then press ENTER.  
*
Internet radio services provided by a third party may be  
terminated with or without notice.  
Top Artists Station:  
You can play tracks of top-rated artists.  
Top Tags Station:  
You can play tracks of top-rated tags.  
Personal Station:  
• You can play tracks from personalized station  
(“Your Library”, “Your Neighbourhood” and  
Your Recommendations”).  
My Library:  
Internet radio services may not be available in some areas.  
Sit back and enjoy selections from all the music  
you’ve heard since you joined Last.fm.  
Tag Radio:  
Polish funk? Death pop? Think of a style and we’ll  
entertain you with it for hours.  
Start your free trial straight away when you create  
your account and see for yourself what it’s like to  
have the world’s music at your fingertips. Latest  
prices and full information are available at  
www.last.fm/subscribe  
En-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using Internet Radio  
You can control the tracks with the buttons on  
the remote control.  
Using Slacker Personal Radio  
6
If you do not have an account, create one on  
the Slacker website (www.slacker.com) with  
your computer.  
Enabled buttons: 1, 3, 2, 6  
Stores information to server, making it more likely  
that the song will be played again.  
Ban Song:  
Stores information to server, making it less likely  
that the song will be played again.  
Ban Artist:  
Stores information to server, making it less likely  
that the songs from this artist will be played  
again.  
Mark Favorite:  
Adds the currently playing station to your  
favorites.  
Unmark Favorite:  
Deletes the currently playing station from your  
favorites.  
1
Menu Items  
Rate Song as Favorite:  
If you already have a Slacker account, select  
“Sign in to your account” and then press  
ENTER.  
The keyboard screen appears. You can enter  
information from the remote control or the keys  
on the main unit.  
If there are no mistakes in the information you  
have entered, use q/w/e/rto select “OK”  
then press ENTER.  
2
3
An account information confirmation screen  
appears.  
If you do not have an account, select “Access  
without Sign In” and press ENTER to use a  
restricted version of the service.  
Note that use will be restricted.  
Add song to Library:  
Tip  
Adds the currently playing track to your library.  
Delete song from Library:  
Deletes the currently playing track from your  
library.  
Add to My Favorites:  
Adds a station or song to My Favorites list.  
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using  
Multiple Accounts” (page 1). Login can be made  
from the “Users” screen.  
Use q/wto select a menu item and then press  
4
5
ENTER.  
To sign out, use q/wto select “Sign out” from  
this screen and then press ENTER.  
Use q/wto select a station and then press  
ENTER or 1to start playback from the  
station.  
The playback screen appears.  
En-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using Internet Radio  
Playing Contents on the AV Receiver  
The track at the top of the music list is automatically  
played back.  
Using MP3tunes  
Tip  
Listen to your music collection on your home stereo in  
complete digital fidelity without a personal computer  
plus safely backup all your songs. Here’s how:  
Use q/wto select a track and press ENTER or  
5
• Before proceeding, you need to select the MP3tunes  
service as described in “Common Procedures in Internet  
Radio Menu” (page 1).  
1to start playback.  
A playback screen appears.  
You can control the tracks with the buttons on the  
remote control.  
Creating an Account on your Computer  
Use q/wto select “Sign in to your account”,  
1
and then press ENTER.  
Enabled buttons: 1, 3, 2, 7, 6  
From your computer, open a web browser and  
go to: www.mp3tunes.com/signup  
1
Enter the e-mail address and password you  
used when creating your account, select “OK”  
and press ENTER.  
Menu Items  
2
Go to Menu:  
Create an account.  
2
3
Displays additional menu options.  
The keyboard screen appears. You can enter  
your user name and password from the remote  
controller or the buttons on the AV receiver.  
Click the Upload link  
(www.mp3tunes.com/upload) to add files to  
your Locker.  
You can view or change your MP3tunes  
account settings by going to  
www.mp3tunes.com/account.  
If there are no mistakes in the information you  
3
View, edit and listen to your files by clicking  
on Player (www.mp3tunes.com/player).  
4
have entered, select “OK” and press ENTER.  
An account information confirmation screen  
appears.  
Tip  
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using  
Multiple Accounts” (page 1). Login can be made  
from the “Users” screen.  
Use q/wto select the menu, then press  
4
ENTER.  
Music:  
The place to find your Artists, Albums, and  
Playlists.  
Shuffle:  
Starts playing a random selection of tracks from  
your Locker.  
Search:  
Find a specific Album, Artist, or Song.  
Account Info:  
Your MP3tunes account information.  
Sign Out:  
Log out of your MP3tunes account.  
En-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Utilisation d’une webradio  
Utilisation de plusieurs comptes  
®
Pandora internet Radio  
Utilisation d’une  
webradio  
L’ampli-tuner AV prend en charge plusieurs comptes  
utilisateur, ce qui signifie que vous pouvez librement  
commuter entre plusieurs connexions. Après avoir  
enregistré des comptes utilisateur, l’identification est  
réalisée à partir de l’écran « Users ».  
–Pour commencer  
(États-Unis uniquement).......................... 2  
Utilisation de Rhapsody  
Procédures courantes dans le menu de  
webradio  
(Etats-Unis uniquement).......................... 3  
Appuyez sur MENU lorsque l’écran Users est  
affiché.  
1
Remarque  
Utilisation de SiriusXM Internet Radio  
(Amérique du Nord uniquement) ............ 4  
Les éléments de menu suivants s’affichent :  
Add new user :  
• Les services disponibles peuvent varier en fonction de la  
région.  
• Certain services réseau ou contenus disponible via cet  
appareil peuvent être inaccessibles au cas où le prestataire  
de services terminerait son service.  
Remove this user :  
Vous pouvez soit stocker un nouveau compte  
utilisateur, soit en supprimer un existant.  
Utilisation de la webradio Last.fm................5  
Utilisation de Slacker Personal Radio ......... 6  
Appuyez sur NET.  
1
Conseil  
Une liste des services réseau s’affiche, et le  
témoin NET s’allume. S’il clignote, vérifiez que le  
câble Ethernet est fermement branché sur  
l’ampli-tuner AV.  
• Certains des services ne permettent pas l’utilisation de  
plusieurs comptes utilisateur.  
• Vous pouvez stocker jusqu’à 10 comptes utilisateur.  
• Pour commuter entre les comptes, vous devez d’abord  
vous déconnecter du compte actuel, puis vous reconnectez  
depuis l’écran « Users ».  
Sélectionnez le service désiré et appuyez sur  
ENTER.  
2
La page principale du service sélectionné  
s’affiche.  
Fr-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Utilisation d’une webradio  
Delete this station :  
Pandora® internet Radio  
–Pour commencer (États-Unis  
uniquement)  
Pour lire une station, utilisez q/wpour  
sélectionner la station dans votre liste de  
stations, puis appuyez sur ENTER.  
2
Ceci supprimera de façon permanente la station  
de votre compte Pandora. Au cas où vous  
décideriez de récréer la station avec les mêmes  
pistes ou les mêmes artistes, tous vos  
acceptations/rejets précédents seront perdus.  
Create station from this track :  
Permet de créer une station radio à partir de  
cette piste.  
La lecture débute et l’écran de lecture s’affiche.  
Create a New Station :  
Pandora est un service de radio en ligne libre et  
personnalisé vous permettant de lire la musique que  
vous connaissez et de découvrir celle que vous  
aimez.  
Saisissez le nom d’une piste, d’un artiste ou d’un  
genre et Pandora créera une station radio unique  
pour vous en fonction des qualités musicales de  
la piste, de l’artiste ou du genre choisi.  
Rename this station :  
Vous permet de renommer la station radio  
actuelle.  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner « I have a  
1
Eléments du menu  
I like this track :  
Acceptez la piste et Pandora lira d’autres  
musiques similaires.  
I don’t like this track :  
Rejetez la piste et Pandora éliminera cette piste  
de la station écoutée.  
Why is this track playing? :  
Découvrez certains des attributs musicaux que  
Pandora utilise pour créer vos stations radio  
personnelles.  
Pandora Account » ou « I’m new to Pandora »,  
puis appuyez sur ENTER.  
Si vous ne connaissez pas Pandora sélectionnez  
« I’m new to Pandora ». Un code d’activation  
apparaîtra sur l’écran de votre téléviseur. Notez  
ce code. Utilisez un ordinateur branché sur  
Internet et connectez le navigateur à  
Bookmark this artist :  
Pandora marquera votre artiste préféré pour  
votre profil sur www.pandora.com.  
Bookmark this track :  
Pandora marquera la piste en cours et vous  
permettra de toutes les acheter sur Amazon ou  
iTunes en une étape !  
Add to My Favorites :  
Permet d’ajouter une station à la liste My  
Favorites.  
www.pandora.com/onkyo  
Saisissez votre code d’activation puis suivez les  
instructions pour créer votre compte Pandora et  
vos stations webradio Pandora personnalisées.  
Lorsque vous y êtes invités, vous pouvez créer  
vos stations en saisissant vos pistes et vos  
artistes préférés. Après la création de votre  
compte et de vos stations, vous pouvez retourner  
à votre récepteur Onkyo et appuyez sur entrée  
pour écouter votre webradio Pandora  
I’m tired of this track :  
Si vous en avez assez d’une piste, vous pouvez  
mettre la piste « au repos » et Pandora ne la lira  
plus pendant un mois.  
Create station from this artist :  
Permet de créer une station radio à partir de cet  
artiste.  
PANDORA, le logo PANDORA, et l’habillage  
commercial Pandora sont des marques  
commerciales ou des marques déposées de la  
société Pandora Media, Inc. Utilisées avec  
autorisation.  
personnalisée.  
Si vous disposez d’un compte Pandora, vous  
pouvez ajouter votre compte Pandora à votre  
récepteur Onkyo en sélectionnant « I have a  
Pandora Account » et y accéder en entrant  
votre adresse e-mail et votre mot de passe.  
Conseil  
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes  
utilisateur, consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs  
comptes » (page 1). L’identification peut être  
réalisée à partir de l’écran « Users ».  
Fr-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Utilisation d’une webradio  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner le menu, puis  
appuyez sur ENTER.  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner un canal, puis  
appuyez sur ENTER ou 1pour démarrer la  
lecture.  
Utilisation de Rhapsody (Etats-Unis  
uniquement)  
2
3
Search :  
Vous pouvez rechercher des morceaux par  
artiste, par album ou par piste.  
Music Guide :  
La lecture débute et l’écran de lecture s’affiche.  
Vous pouvez contrôlez les pistes avec les  
touches sur la télécommande.  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner « Sign in to your  
1
account », puis appuyez sur ENTER.  
Vous devez posséder un compte pour utiliser  
Rhapsody. Si vous ne disposez pas encore d’un  
compte, vous pouvez en créer un à partir de  
www.rhapsody.com/onkyo  
Vous pouvez lire des pistes à partir des  
genres,des meilleurs artistes, des meilleurs  
albums, des meilleures pistes, des nouveautés et  
des sélections du personnel.  
Rhapsody Channels :  
Écoutez les canaux de radio programmée par les  
meilleurs éditeurs de Rhapsody.  
Playlists :  
Permet de jouer vos listes de lecture  
personnelles.  
My Library :  
Marquez vos albums et vos pistes personnelles  
dans le catalogue de Rhapsody à l’aide de My  
Library.  
Boutons activés : 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, 7,  
6, RANDOM, REPEAT  
Remarque  
Si vous possédez déjà un compte Rhapsody,  
sélectionnez « Sign in to your account », puis  
appuyez sur ENTER.  
Saisissez votre nom utilisateur (en général votre  
adresse électronique) et votre mot de passe dans  
l’écran clavier suivant ou dans Configuration  
Web.  
• Sur les canaux Rhapsody, certaines touches ne  
fonctionnent pas.  
Eléments du menu  
Add track to My Library :  
Marquez les pistes en cours de lecture.  
Add album to My Library :  
Marquez les albums en cours de lecture.  
Add playlist to My Library :  
Marquez les listes de lecture en cours de lecture.  
Add channel to My Channels :  
Marquez les canaux de radio Rhapsody en cours  
de lecture.  
Add to My Favorites :  
Permet d’ajouter une piste, un canal ou une liste  
de lecture à la liste My Favorites.  
Utilisation de l’écran clavier  
1. Utilisez q/w/e/ret ENTER pour saisir votre  
nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de passe.  
2. Sélectionnez « OK ».  
Account Info :  
Vérifiez les informations de votre compte.  
Sign Out :  
3. Appuyez sur ENTER. L’écran « Confirm  
your entries » s’affiche.  
4. Appuyez sur ENTER.  
Déconnectez-vous de votre compte Rhapsody.  
Conseil  
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes  
utilisateur, consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs  
comptes » (page 1). L’identification peut être  
réalisée à partir de l’écran « Users ».  
Conseil  
• Vous pouvez supprimer des pistes, des albums et des  
canaux Rhapsody marqués de My Library.  
Fr-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Utilisation d’une webradio  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner « Sign In », puis  
appuyez sur ENTER.  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner le canal de  
votre choix, puis appuyez sur ENTER.  
L’écran de lecture du canal sélectionné s’affiche  
et vous pouvez écouter SiriusXM Internet Radio.  
Vous pouvez contrôlez les pistes avec les  
touches sur la télécommande.  
Utilisation de SiriusXM Internet Radio  
(Amérique du Nord uniquement)  
1
3
Si vous possédez déjà un compte SIRIUS, vous  
pouvez y accéder en sélectionnant « Sign In ».  
Saisissez votre nom utilisateur et votre mot de  
passe dans l’écran clavier suivant ou dans  
Configuration Web. Si vous ne connaissez pas  
votre nom d’utilisateur ou votre mot de passe,  
appelez Sirius XM au (888) 539-7474 pour  
obtenir une assistance.  
Votre ampli-tuner AV Onkyo comprend un essai  
gratuit de SiriusXM Internet Radio. L’écran « Account  
Info » affiche le nombre de jours restants dans votre  
essai. Une fois la période d’essai expirée, si vous  
souhaitez continuer à écouter le service, vous devez  
vous abonner. Pour vous inscrire, accédez à  
l’adresse  
Boutons activés : 2, 3, 7, 6  
Eléments du menu  
Add to My Favorites :  
www.siriusxm.com/internetradio à l’aide de votre  
ordinateur.  
Permet d’ajouter un canal à la liste My Favorites.  
Conseil  
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes  
utilisateur, consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs  
comptes » (page 1). L’identification peut être  
réalisée à partir de l’écran « Users ».  
Lorsque vous vous inscrivez, vous devez fournir un  
nom est un mot de passe utilisateur qui doivent être  
saisis dans l’ampli-tuner AV.  
Les abonnements SiriusXM Internet Radio sont  
vendus séparément et sont subordonnés par les  
conditions Sirius (voir www.sirius.com). Assurez-vous  
de lire cet accord avant d’acquérir votre abonnement.  
Sirius, XM et tous les logos et marques afférents sont  
des marques déposées de Sirius XM Radio Inc. et de  
ses filiales. Tous droits réservés.  
Utilisation de l’écran clavier  
1. Utilisez q/w/e/ret ENTER pour saisir votre  
nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de passe.  
2. Sélectionnez « OK ».  
Pour utiliser SiriusXM Internet Radio, l’ampli-tuner AV  
doit être connecté à Internet. Suivez les étapes ci-  
dessous à l’aide de la télécommande :  
3. Appuyez sur ENTER. L’écran « Confirm  
your entries » s’affiche.  
4. Appuyez sur ENTER.  
« Please wait... » s’affiche, puis l’écran  
« SiriusXM Internet Radio » affiche la catégorie  
que vous pouvez sélectionner.  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner la catégorie,  
puis appuyez sur ENTER.  
2
L’écran de la liste des canaux de la catégorie  
sélectionnée s’affiche.  
Fr-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Utilisation d’une webradio  
Profile :  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner « Sign in to  
your account », puis appuyez sur ENTER.  
Vous possédez déjà un compte Last.fm, vous  
pouvez vous y connecter pour sélectionner  
« Sign in to your account ». Saisissez votre  
nom utilisateur et votre mot de passe dans  
l’écran clavier suivant.  
Utilisation de la webradio Last.fm  
1
Vous pouvez lire des pistes de « Recently  
Listened Tracks », « Library » et  
« Neighbours ».  
Account Info :  
Vérifiez les informations de votre compte.  
Sign Out :  
Last.fm un service de musique qui apprend ce que  
vous aimez…  
Votre nouvel ampli-tuner AV Onkyo est très intelligent.  
Si vous avez un compte Last.fm gratuit, il garde une  
trace de toutes les chansons que vous avez juste  
jouées. Quand vous vous rendez sur le site Web de  
Last.fm, vous pouvez voir les graphiques personnels  
de la musique que vous avez appréciée, les partagez  
avec vos amis et également voir ce qu’ils aiment.  
Pour vous déconnecter de votre compte.  
Utilisation de l’écran clavier  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner une station, puis  
1. Utilisez q/w/e/ret le bouton ENTER pour  
saisir votre nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de  
passe.  
3
appuyez sur ENTER ou  
lecture.  
1
pour démarrer la  
2. Sélectionnez « OK ».  
La lecture débute et l’écran de lecture s’affiche.  
Avec des milliers de biographies, de revues et un  
choix infini de stations de radio personnalisées et  
sans pub, Last.fm est excellent moyen de découvrir  
de la musique. Créez aujourd’hui votre compte  
Last.fm gratuit sur www.last.fm/join  
3. Appuyez sur ENTER. L’écran « Confirm  
your entries » s’affiche.  
4. Appuyez sur ENTER.  
« Please wait... » apparait puis l’écran « Last.fm  
Internet Radio » apparait.  
Eléments du menu  
I Love this track :  
L’information de la piste est sauvegardée dans le  
serveur Last.fm, et la fréquence de lecture  
augmente.  
Inscrivez-vous et vous pourrez apprécier le meilleur  
de la radio sans pub Last.fm sur votre ampli-tuner AV  
Onkyo sans ordinateur !  
Conseil  
Ban this track :  
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes  
utilisateur, consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs  
comptes » (page 1). L’identification peut être  
réalisée à partir de l’écran « Users ».  
L’information de la piste est sauvegardée dans le  
serveur Last.fm, et la fréquence de lecture  
diminue.  
Add to My Favorites :  
Permet d’ajouter une station à la liste My  
Favorites.  
Recommended Radio :  
Découvrez les recommandations personnalisées  
futées qui changent en même temps que vos goûts.  
Artist Radio :  
Sélectionnez n’importe quel artiste et nous vous  
jouerons une station entière de musique inspirée par  
votre choix.  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner un menu puis  
appuyez sur ENTER.  
2
Search Station :  
Utilisation du contrôle Scrobbling  
Vous pouvez rechercher une station par artiste,  
par tag ou par nom d’utilisateur.  
Top Artists Station :  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner « Enable », puis  
My Library :  
appuyez sur ENTER.  
Reposez-vous de retour et appréciez les sélections à  
partir de toute la musique que vous avez entendue  
depuis que vous avez joint Last.fm.  
Tag Radio :  
Funk polonaise ? Death pop ? Pensez à un style et  
nous vous divertirons avec pendant des heures.  
Vous pouvez lire des pistes des artistes les mieux  
évalués.  
Top Tags Station :  
Vous pouvez lire des pistes des tags les mieux  
évalués.  
Personal Station :  
*
Les services de webradio fournis par un tiers peuvent être  
résiliés avec ou sans préavis.  
Les services de webradio peuvent ne pas être accessibles  
dans certaines zones.  
Vous pouvez lire des pistes de votre station  
personnalisée (« Your Library », « Your  
Neighbourhood » et « Your  
Recommendations »).  
Commencez votre essai gratuit immédiatement à la  
création votre compte et découvrez par vous-même  
ce que cela fait d’avoir la musique du monde au bouts  
des doigts. Les derniers prix et les informations  
complètes sont disponibles sur www.last.fm/subscribe  
Fr-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Utilisation d’une webradio  
Vous pouvez contrôlez les pistes avec les  
touches sur la télécommande.  
Utilisation de Slacker Personal Radio  
6
Si vous ne possédez pas de compte, créez-en  
Boutons activés : 1, 3, 2, 6  
1
un à partir du site Web de Slacker  
(www.slacker.com) à l’aide de votre  
ordinateur.  
Eléments du menu  
Rate Song as Favorite :  
Permet de stocker des informations sur le  
serveur, et d’augmenter la probabilité que le  
morceau soit lu de nouveau.  
Si vous possédez déjà un compte Slacker,  
sélectionnez « Sign in to your account », puis  
appuyez sur ENTER.  
L’écran clavier s’affiche. Pouvez saisir des  
informations à partir de la télécommande ou des  
touches sur l’appareil principal.  
Ban Song :  
Permet de stocker des informations sur le  
serveur, et de diminuer la probabilité que le  
morceau soit lu de nouveau.  
Si les informations que vous avez saisies ne  
comportent pas d’erreur, utilisezq/w/e/r  
pour sélectionner « OK », puis appuyez sur  
ENTER.  
Ban Artist :  
2
3
Permet de stocker des informations sur le  
serveur, et de diminuer la probabilité que les  
morceaux de cet artiste soient lus de nouveau.  
Mark Favorite :  
Permet d’ajouter la station en cours de lecture à  
vos favoris.  
Unmark Favorite :  
Permet de supprimer la station en cours de  
lecture de vos favoris.  
L’écran de confirmation des informations du  
compte s’affiche.  
Si vous ne possédez pas de compte,  
sélectionnez « Access without Sign In », puis  
appuyez sur ENTER pour utiliser une version  
restreinte du service.  
Veuillez noter que l’utilisation est restreinte.  
Add song to Library :  
Permet d’ajouter la piste en cours de lecture à  
votre bibliothèque.  
Delete song from Library :  
Permet de supprimer la piste en cours de lecture  
de votre bibliothèque.  
Conseil  
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes  
utilisateur, consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs  
comptes » (page 1). L’identification peut être  
réalisée à partir de l’écran « Users ».  
Add to My Favorites :  
Permet d’ajouter une station ou un morceau à la  
liste My Favorites.  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner un élément du  
4
5
menu, puis appuyez sur ENTER.  
Pour vous déconnecter, utilisez q/wpour  
sélectionner « Sign out » depuis cet écran, puis  
appuyez sur ENTER.  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner une station,  
puis appuyez sur ENTER ou 1pour démarrer  
la lecture depuis cette station.  
L’écran de lecture apparaît.  
Fr-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Uso de Internet Radio  
Uso de múltiples cuentas  
®
Uso de Internet Radio  
Pandora Internet Radio  
El receptor de AV permite múltiples cuentas de  
usuario, lo que quiere decir que se puede cambiar  
libremente entre varios usuarios. Después de  
registrar las cuentas de usuario, el acceso se realiza  
desde la pantalla “Users”.  
–Primeros pasos (solo EE.UU.)............... 2  
Procedimientos comunes en el menú  
Internet Radio  
Uso de Rhapsody (sólo EE.UU.)................... 3  
Nota  
Pulse MENU cuando aparezca la pantalla de  
usuarios.  
Aparecerán los siguientes elementos del menú:  
Add new user:  
Remove this user:  
1
• Los servicios disponibles pueden variar de una región a  
otra.  
• Es posible que determinados servicios de red o contenidos  
disponibles a través de este dispositivo no sean accesibles  
si el proveedor del servicio da por finalizado el servicio.  
Uso de SiriusXM Internet Radio  
(solo Norteamérica).................................. 4  
Puede guardar una nueva cuenta de usuario o  
borrar una existente.  
Uso de Last.fm Internet Radio...................... 5  
Uso de Slacker Personal Radio.................... 6  
Pulse NET.  
1
Aparecerá una lista de los servicios de red y se  
iluminará el indicador NET. Si parpadea,  
verifique que el cable Ethernet esté firmemente  
conectado al receptor de AV.  
Consejo  
• Algunos de los servicios no permiten el uso de múltiples  
cuentas de usuario.  
• Puede guardar hasta 10 cuentas de usuario.  
• Para cambiar entre cuentas debe antes cerrar sesión en la  
cuenta actual y acceder de nuevo en la pantalla “Users”.  
Seleccione el servicio deseado y pulse  
ENTER.  
Aparecerá la página principal del servicio  
seleccionado.  
2
Es-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Uso de Internet Radio  
Delete this station:  
Pandora® Internet Radio  
–Primeros pasos (solo EE.UU.)  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar la emisora en la  
lista de emisoras y luego pulse ENTER.  
Se inicia la reproducción y aparece la pantalla de  
reproducción.  
2
Esto eliminará de forma permanente una  
emisora de su cuenta de Pandora. Toda la  
información sobre sus aprobaciones/  
desaprobaciones se perderá si quiere volver a  
crear la emisora con el mismo tema o artista.  
Create station from this track:  
Crea una emisora de radio a partir de este tema.  
Rename this station:  
Le permite renombrar la emisora de radio actual.  
Bookmark this artist:  
Pandora marcará su artista favorito para su perfil  
en www.pandora.com.  
Bookmark this track:  
Pandora marcará el tema actual y le permitirá  
comprarlos todos en Amazon o iTunes ¡con un  
solo paso!  
Pandora es un servicio de radio por Internet gratuito y  
personalizado que reproduce la música que usted  
conoce y le ayudará a descubrir música que le  
encantará.  
Create a New Station:  
Introduzca el nombre de un tema, artista o  
género; Pandora creará una emisora de radio  
exclusiva para usted basada en las cualidades  
musicales de ese tema, de ese artista o de ese  
género.  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar “I have a Pandora  
1
Account” o “I’m new to Pandora” y luego  
pulse ENTER.  
Elementos del menú  
I like this track:  
Si no conoce Pandora seleccione “I’m new to  
Pandora”. Verá un código de activación en la  
pantalla del televisor. Tome nota de este código.  
Vaya a un ordenador conectado a Internet y dirija  
el navegador a www.pandora.com/onkyo  
Introduzca su código de activación y siga las  
instrucciones para crear su cuenta de Pandora y  
sus emisoras de radio por Internet  
Si aprueba (pulgar arriba) un tema, Pandora  
reproducirá más música parecida.  
I don’t like this track:  
Si no aprueba (pulgar abajo) el tema, Pandora  
eliminará dicho tema de la emisora actual.  
Why is this track playing?:  
Descubra algunos de los atributos musicales que  
Pandora utiliza para crear sus emisoras de radio  
personalizadas.  
Add to My Favorites:  
Añade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos.  
personalizadas de Pandora. Puede crear sus  
propias emisoras introduciendo sus temas y  
artistas favoritos cuando aparezca la solicitud  
correspondiente. Una vez creada su cuenta y sus  
emisoras, puede regresar al receptor Onkyo y  
pulsar Enter para empezar a escuchar su radio  
por Internet personalizada de Pandora.  
Si ya dispone de una cuenta de Pandora, puede  
añadirla al receptor Onkyo seleccionando “I have  
a Pandora Account” e iniciando la sesión con su  
dirección de correo electrónico y contraseña.  
I’m tired of this track:  
PANDORA, el logotipo de PANDORA logo, y la  
imagen corporativa de Pandora son marcas  
comerciales o marcas comerciales registradas de  
Pandora Media, Inc. Uso con permiso.  
Si se cansa de un tema, puede “silenciarlo” de  
modo que Pandora no lo reproduzca durante un  
mes.  
Crea una emisora de radio a partir de este  
artista.  
Consejo  
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario,  
consulte “Uso de múltiples cuentas” (página 1). Se  
puede iniciar sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.  
Es-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Uso de Internet Radio  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar el menú y luego  
pulse ENTER.  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar una emisora y  
luego pulse ENTER o 1para iniciar la  
reproducción.  
Uso de Rhapsody (sólo EE.UU.)  
2
3
Search:  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar “Sign in to your  
1
account” y luego pulse ENTER.  
Puede buscar música por artista, álbum o  
canción.  
Se inicia la reproducción y aparece la pantalla de  
reproducción.  
Para utilizar Rhapsody, necesitará una cuenta. Si  
todavía no tiene una, puede crear una nueva en  
www.rhapsody.com/onkyo  
Music Guide:  
Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del  
mando a distancia.  
Puede reproducir canciones por géneros, artistas  
principales, álbumes principales o canciones  
principales, novedades, selección del sitio.  
Rhapsody Channels:  
Escuche las emisoras de radio programadas por  
los principales redactores de Rhapsody.  
Playlists:  
Si ya tiene una cuenta Rhapsody, seleccione  
Sign in to your account” y pulse ENTER.  
Escriba su nombre de usuario (normalmente el  
correo electrónico) y contraseña en la pantalla de  
teclado que aparece a continuación o en la  
configuración web.  
Botones activados: 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, 7,  
6, RANDOM, REPEAT  
Nota  
• En Rhapsody Channels, algunos de los botones no  
funcionan.  
Elementos del menú  
Add track to My Library:  
Marca las canciones que se están reproduciendo  
actualmente.  
Add album to My Library:  
Marca los álbumes que se están reproduciendo  
actualmente.  
Add playlist to My Library:  
Marca las listas de reproducción que se están  
reproduciendo actualmente.  
Add channel to My Channels:  
Marca las emisoras de Rhapsody que se están  
reproduciendo actualmente.  
Reproduzca sus listas personales.  
My Library:  
Marque sus álbumes y canciones preferidas en  
el catálogo de Rhapsody, usando Mi biblioteca.  
Account Info:  
Confirme los datos de su cuenta.  
Sign Out:  
Salga de su cuenta Rhapsody.  
Utilización de la pantalla de teclado  
1. Utilice q/w/e/ry ENTER para introducir su  
nombre de usuario y su contraseña.  
2. Seleccione OK”.  
3. Pulse ENTER. Aparecerá la pantalla  
Confirm your entries”.  
4. Pulse ENTER.  
Consejo  
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario,  
consulte “Uso de múltiples cuentas” (página 1). Se  
puede iniciar sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.  
Add to My Favorites:  
Añade una canción, emisora o lista de  
reproducción a la lista Mis favoritos.  
Consejo  
• Puede eliminar las canciones, los álbumes y las  
emisoras de Rhapsody marcados de Mi biblioteca.  
Es-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Uso de Internet Radio  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar “Sign In”, y luego  
pulse ENTER.  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar la emisora  
Uso de SiriusXM Internet Radio (solo  
Norteamérica)  
1
3
deseada y luego pulse ENTER.  
Si ya tiene una cuenta SIRIUS, puede acceder  
seleccionando “Sign In”. Escriba su nombre de  
usuario y contraseña en la pantalla de teclado  
que aparece a continuación o en la configuración  
web. Si no sabe su nombre de usuario o la  
contraseña, llame a Sirius XM al número (888)  
539-7474 para solicitar asistencia.  
Aparecerá la pantalla de reproducción de la  
emisora seleccionada y ahora usted podrá  
escuchar SiriusXM Internet Radio.  
Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del  
mando a distancia.  
Su receptor de AV Onkyo incluye una prueba gratuita  
de SiriusXM Internet Radio. La pantalla “Account  
Info” muestra los días que quedan de la prueba. Una  
vez que termine el periodo de prueba, si desea seguir  
escuchando este servicio, deberá contratarlo. para  
suscribirse vaya a  
Botones activados: 2, 3, 7, 6  
Elementos del menú  
www.siriusxm.com/internetradio con su  
ordenador.  
Consejo  
Add to My Favorites:  
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario,  
consulte “Uso de múltiples cuentas” (página 1). Se  
puede iniciar sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.  
Añade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos.  
Cuando se suscriba, recibirá un nombre de usuario y  
una contraseña que deberá introducir en el receptor  
de AV.  
Utilización de la pantalla de teclado  
1. Utilice q/w/e/ry ENTER para introducir su  
nombre de usuario y su contraseña.  
2. Seleccione OK”.  
Las suscripciones a SiriusXM Internet Radio se  
venden por separado y se rigen por las condiciones  
de Sirius (consulte www.sirius.com). Lea  
atentamente este acuerdo antes de comprar la  
suscripción. Sirius, XM y todas las marcas y logotipos  
relacionados son marcas comerciales de Sirius XM  
Radio Inc. y sus filiales. Todos los derechos  
reservados.  
Para poder utilizar SiriusXM Internet Radio, el  
receptor de AV debe estar conectado a internet. Para  
usar el mando a distancia, siga este procedimiento:  
3. Pulse ENTER. Aparecerá la pantalla  
Confirm your entries”.  
4. Pulse ENTER.  
Aparecerá “Please wait...” y después la pantalla  
SiriusXM Internet Radio”, que muestra la  
categoría disponible para la selección.  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar la categoría y  
luego pulse ENTER.  
2
Aparece una pantalla con una lista de emisoras  
de la categoría seleccionada.  
Es-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Uso de Internet Radio  
Profile:  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar “Sign in to your  
account”, y luego pulse ENTER.  
Uso de Last.fm Internet Radio  
1
Puede reproducir pistas de “Recently Listened  
Tracks”, “Library” y “Neighbours”.  
Account Info:  
Confirme los datos de su cuenta.  
Sign Out:  
Last.fm es un servicio musical que sabe lo que le  
gusta...  
Si ya tiene una cuenta de Last.fm, puede  
acceder a ella para seleccionar “Sign in to your  
account”. Introduzca su nombre de usuario y  
contraseña en la siguiente pantalla de teclado.  
Su nuevo receptor de AV Onkyo es muy inteligente.  
Si tiene una cuenta gratuita de Last.fm, hará un  
seguimiento de todas las canciones que acaba de  
escuchar. Cuando visite el sitio web de Last.fm,  
podrá ver listas personales de la música que ha  
disfrutado, compartirlas con sus amigos y también  
ver lo que les gusta a ellos.  
Se desconecta de su cuenta.  
Utilización de la pantalla de teclado  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar una emisora y  
luego pulse ENTER o 1 para iniciar la  
reproducción.  
1. Utilice q/w/e/ry ENTER para introducir su  
nombre de usuario y su contraseña.  
2. Seleccione OK”.  
3. Pulse ENTER. Aparecerá la pantalla  
Confirm your entries”.  
Se inicia la reproducción y aparece la pantalla de  
reproducción.  
Con sus miles de biografías, críticas y una infinita  
variedad de emisoras de radio personalizadas y sin  
publicidad, Last.fm es una forma excelente de  
descubrir música. Cree hoy mismo una cuenta  
gratuita de Last.fm en www.last.fm/join  
4. Pulse ENTER.  
Aparecerá “Please wait...” y después la pantalla  
Last.fm Internet Radio”.  
Elementos del menú  
I Love this track:  
Se guarda la información sobre la canción en el  
servidor de Last.fm y aumenta la frecuencia con  
la que se reproduce.  
Consejo  
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario,  
consulte “Uso de múltiples cuentas” (página 1). Se  
puede iniciar sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.  
Si se suscribe podrá disfrutar de lo mejor de Last.fm  
Radio sin anuncios en su receptor de AV Onkyo sin  
necesidad de un ordenador.  
Ban this track:  
Se guarda la información sobre la canción en el  
servidor de Last.fm y se reduce la frecuencia con  
la que se reproduce.  
Add to My Favorites:  
Añade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos.  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar un menú y luego  
pulse ENTER.  
Recommended Radio:  
2
Descubra nuestras interesantes recomendaciones  
personalizadas que se adaptan a sus gustos en cada  
momento.  
Search Station:  
Puede buscar emisoras por artista, etiquetas o  
nombre de usuario.  
Artist Radio:  
Uso del control de scrobbling  
Top Artists Station:  
Puede reproducir canciones de los artistas mejor  
clasificados.  
Top Tags Station:  
Puede reproducir canciones con las etiquetas  
mejor clasificadas.  
Escoja cualquier artista y podrá escuchar una  
emisora de radio inspirada exclusivamente en su  
elección.  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar “Enable”, y luego pulse  
ENTER.  
My Library:  
*
Los servicios de radio por Internet suministrados por  
Relájese y disfrute de selecciones de toda la música  
que ha escuchado desde que se registró en Last.fm.  
Tag Radio:  
terceros pueden cancelarse con o sin aviso previo.  
Es posible que los servicios de radio por Internet no estén  
disponibles en algunas zonas.  
Personal Station:  
Puede reproducir pistas de una emisora  
personalizada (“Your Library”, “Your  
Neighbourhood” y “Your Recommendations”).  
¿Polish funk? ¿Death pop? Piense en un estilo y  
podrá escucharlo durante horas.  
Pruébelo gratis ahora mismo. Cree una cuenta y verá  
por sí mismo lo que significa tener toda la música del  
mundo al alcance de sus oídos. Puede consultar los  
precios actualizados y toda la información que desee  
en www.last.fm/subscribe  
Es-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Uso de Internet Radio  
Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del  
mando a distancia.  
Uso de Slacker Personal Radio  
6
Si no tiene una cuenta, cree una en el sitio web  
de Slacker (www.slacker.com) con su  
ordenador.  
Botones activados: 1, 3, 2, 6  
1
Elementos del menú  
Rate Song as Favorite:  
Guarda información en el servidor, haciendo que  
sea más probable que la canción se vuelva a  
reproducir.  
Si ya tiene una cuenta de Slacker, seleccione  
“Sign in to your account” y pulse ENTER.  
Aparecerá la pantalla de teclado. Puede  
introducir información desde el mando a  
distancia o desde el teclado de la unidad  
principal.  
Ban Song:  
Guarda información en el servidor, haciendo que  
sea menos probable que la canción se vuelva a  
reproducir.  
Si no hay errores en la información que ha  
introducido, utilice q/w/e/rpara seleccionar  
“OK” y luego pulse ENTER.  
2
3
Ban Artist:  
Guarda información en el servidor, haciendo que  
sea menos probable que las canciones de este  
artista se vuelvan a reproducir.  
Mark Favorite:  
Añade la emisora que se está reproduciendo  
actualmente a los favoritos.  
Aparecerá una pantalla de confirmación de la  
información de la cuenta.  
Si no tiene una cuenta, seleccione “Access  
without Sign In” y pulse ENTER para utilizar  
una versión restringida del servicio.  
Unmark Favorite:  
Tenga en cuenta que el uso estará restringido.  
Elimina la emisora que se está reproduciendo  
actualmente de los favoritos.  
Add song to Library:  
Añade la canción que se está reproduciendo  
actualmente a su biblioteca.  
Consejo  
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario,  
consulte “Uso de múltiples cuentas” (página 1). Se  
puede iniciar sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar un menú y luego  
Delete song from Library:  
4
5
pulse ENTER.  
Elimina la canción que se está reproduciendo  
actualmente de la biblioteca.  
Add to My Favorites:  
Añade una emisora o canción a la lista Mis  
favoritos.  
Para salir, utilice q/wpara seleccionar “Sign out”  
en esta pantalla y luego pulse ENTER.  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar una emisora y  
luego pulse ENTER o 1para iniciar la  
reproducción de la emisora.  
Aparecerá la pantalla de reproducción.  
Es-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Y1212-1  
SN 29401478IRUS  
* 2 9 4 0 1 4 7 8 I R U S *  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using Internet Radio  
Using Multiple Accounts  
Using Internet Radio  
The AV receiver supports multiple user accounts,  
which means you can freely switch between several  
logins. After registering user accounts, login is  
performed from the “Users” screen.  
Using Last.fm Internet Radio........................ 2  
Common Procedures in Internet Radio  
Menu  
Note  
Press MENU while the Users screen is  
displayed.  
The following menu items appear:  
Add new user:  
Remove this user:  
1
• Available services may vary depending on the region.  
• Certain network service or contents available through this  
device may not be accessible in case the service provider  
terminates its service.  
You can either store a new user account, or  
delete an existing one.  
Press NET.  
1
A list of the network services appears, and the  
NET indicator lights. If it flashes, verify that the  
Ethernet cable is firmly connected to the AV  
receiver.  
Tip  
• Some of the services don’t allow the use of multiple user  
accounts.  
• You can store up to 10 user accounts.  
• To switch between accounts you must first log out from the  
current account, and log in again on the “Users” screen.  
Select the desired service and press ENTER.  
The top page of the selected service appears.  
2
En-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using Internet Radio  
Profile:  
Use q/wto select “Sign in to your account”,  
and then press ENTER.  
Using Last.fm Internet Radio  
1
You can play tracks from “Recently Listened  
Tracks”, “Library” and “Neighbours”.  
Account Info:  
Confirm your account information.  
Sign Out:  
Last.fm is a music service that learns what you  
love...  
If you have the existing Last.fm account, you can  
sign in to your account to select “Sign in to your  
account”. Enter your user name and password in  
the next keyboard screen.  
Your new Onkyo AV receiver is very clever. If you  
have a free Last.fm account, it will keep track of all  
the songs you’ve just played. When you visit the  
Last.fm website, you can see personal charts of the  
music you’ve enjoyed, share them with friends and  
see what they like, too.  
It signs out from your account.  
Using the keyboard screen  
Use q/wto select a station, and press ENTER  
1. Use q/w/e/rand the ENTER to enter your  
user name and password.  
2. Select OK”.  
or 1 to start playback.  
Playback starts and the playback screen  
appears.  
3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”  
screen appears.  
With thousands of biographies, reviews and an  
endless choice of personalised, ad-free radio  
stations, Last.fm is a great way to discover music.  
Pick up your free Last.fm account today at  
www.last.fm/join  
Enabled buttons: 1, 2, 6  
4. Press ENTER.  
Please wait...” appears and then “Last.fm  
Internet Radio” screen appears.  
Menu Items  
I Love this track:  
Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and  
playback frequency increases.  
Ban this track:  
Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and  
playback frequency reduces.  
Add to My Favorites:  
Tip  
UK and Germany only:  
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using  
Multiple Accounts” (page 1). Login can be made  
from the “Users” screen.  
Get a subscription and you can enjoy the best of ad-  
free Last.fm Radio on your Onkyo AV receiver without  
a computer!  
Recommended Radio:  
Discover smart personalised recommendations that  
adapt as your tastes change.  
Use q/wto select menu and then press  
ENTER.  
2
Adds a station to My Favorites list.  
Search Station:  
You can search station by Artist, Tag, or User  
Name.  
Using scrobbling control  
Artist Radio:  
Use q/wto select “Enable”, and then press ENTER.  
Pick any artist and we’ll play you a whole station of  
music inspired by your choice.  
My Library:  
Sit back and enjoy selections from all the music  
you’ve heard since you joined Last.fm.  
Tag Radio:  
Top Artists Station:  
You can play tracks of top-rated artists.  
Top Tags Station:  
You can play tracks of top-rated tags.  
Personal Station:  
You can play tracks from personalized station  
(“Your Library”, “Your Neighbourhood” and  
Your Recommendations”).  
*
Internet radio services provided by a third party may be  
terminated with or without notice.  
Internet radio services may not be available in some areas.  
Polish funk? Death pop? Think of a style and we’ll  
entertain you with it for hours.  
Start your free trial straight away when you create  
your account and see for yourself what it’s like to  
have the world’s music at your fingertips. Latest  
prices and full information are available at  
www.last.fm/subscribe  
En-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Internetradio verwenden  
Verwendung mehrerer Konten  
Internetradio verwenden  
Der AV-Receiver unterstützt mehrere Nutzerkonten,  
was bedeutet, dass Sie frei zwischen mehreren  
Logins umschalten können. Nach der Anmeldung der  
Nutzerkonten wird das Login vom „Users“ Bildschirm  
aus vorgenommen.  
Verwendung von Last.fm Internet Radio..... 2  
Allgemeine Verfahren bei den  
Internetradio-Menüs  
Anmerkung  
Drücken Sie MENU während der Bildschirm  
• Die verfügbaren Dienste sind länderabhängig verschieden.  
• Bestimmte Netzwerkdienste oder über dieses Gerät zur  
Verfügung stehende Inhalte stehen eventuell nicht zur  
Verfügung, falls der Service-Anbieter seine Dienstleistung  
beendet.  
1
des Nutzers angezeigt wird.  
Das folgende Menü erscheint:  
Add new user:  
Remove this user:  
Sie können entweder ein neues Nutzerkonto  
abspeichern oder ein bestehendes löschen.  
Drücken Sie NET.  
1
Es erscheint eine Liste der Netzwerkdienste und  
die NET-Anzeige leuchtet. Wenn sie blinkt,  
überprüfen Sie ob das Ethernet-Kabel fest im AV-  
Receiver eingesteckt ist.  
Tipp  
• Einige dieser Dienstleistungen lassen keine mehrfachen  
Nutzerkonten zu.  
• Sie können bis zu 10 Nutzerkonten speichern.  
• Um zwischen den Konten umzuschalten, müssen Sie sich  
zuerst aus Ihrem aktuellen Konto ausloggen und sich dann  
wieder auf dem „Users“ Bildschirm einloggen.  
Wählen Sie den gewünschten Service aus und  
drücken Sie ENTER.  
Die oberste Seite des ausgewählten Services  
erscheint.  
2
De-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Internetradio verwenden  
können. Die aktuellen Nutzungspreise und umfassende  
Infos sind unter www.last.fm/subscribe erhältlich  
Personal Station:  
Verwendung von Last.fm Internet Radio  
Sie können Titel aus einem persönlich  
angepassten Sender wiedergeben („Your  
Library“, „Your Neighbourhood“ und „Your  
Recommendations“).  
Last.fm ist ein Musikdienst, der sich Ihre  
Lieblingsmusik merkt...  
Verwenden Sie q/w, um „Sign in to your  
1
account“ auszuwählen und dann drücken Sie  
ENTER.  
Wenn Sie über einen bestehenden Last.fm Konto  
verfügen, können Sie sich anmelden und „Sign  
in to your account“ wählen. Geben Sie Ihre Ihre  
Benutzernamen und das Kennwort in der  
folgenden Tastaturanzeige ein.  
Ihr neuer Onkyo AV-Receiver ist äußerst clever. Wenn Sie  
ein kostenloses Last.fm-Konto eingerichtet haben, werden  
darin alle kürzlich abgespielten Titel gespeichert. Wenn Sie  
die Last.fm-Website besuchen, können Sie Ihre  
persönlichen Charts der von Ihnen abgespielten Musik  
anzeigen; teilen Sie diese mit Freunden und sehen Sie  
auch, welche Musik Ihre Freunde mögen.  
Profile:  
Sie können Titel aus „Recently Listened Tracks“,  
Library“ und „Neighbours“ wiedergeben.  
Account Info:  
Bestätigen Sie Ihre Kontoinformation.  
Sign Out:  
Verwendung der Tastaturanzeige  
Mit tausenden von Biografien, Rezensionen und einer  
schier endlosen Auswahl an persönlich angepassten,  
werbefreien Radiosendern ist Last.fm eine großartige  
Gelegenheit, um Musik zu entdecken. Holen Sie sich  
Ihr kostenloses Last.fm-Konto noch heute unter  
www.last.fm/join  
Zur Abmeldung aus Ihrem Konto.  
1. Verwenden Sie  
Ihren Nutzernamen und Passwort einzugeben.  
2. Wählen Sie „OK“.  
3. Drücken Sie ENTER. Die Anzeige „Confirm  
your entries“ erscheint.  
q
/
w
/
e
/
r
und den ENTER, um  
Verwenden Sie q/w, um einen Sender  
auszuwählen und dann drücken Sie ENTER  
oder 1 , um die Wiedergabe zu starten.  
Die Wiedergabe wird gestartet und die  
Wiedergabeanzeige erscheint.  
3
4. Drücken Sie ENTER.  
Please wait...“ wird angezeigt und danach  
erscheint die „Last.fm Internet Radio“-Anzeige.  
Nur für Großbritannien und Deutschland:  
Holen Sie sich ein Abonnement und Sie können auch  
ohne Computer die besten werbefreien Last.fm-  
Radiosender auf Ihrem Onkyo AV-Receiver hören!  
Recommended Radio:  
Entdecken Sie smarte, persönlich angepasste  
Empfehlungen, die sich mit Ihrem Musikgeschmack  
verändern.  
Aktivierte Tasten: 1, 2, 6  
Menüsymbole  
I Love this track:  
Tipp  
Titel-Informationen werden auf dem Last.fm-  
Server gespeichert und die Häufigkeit der  
Wiedergabe wird erhöht.  
• Falls Sie mehrere Nutzerkonten verwenden möchten,  
schlagen Sie bitte unter „Verwendung mehrerer  
Konten“ nach (Seite 1). Das Login kann vom  
Users“-Bildschirm aus erfolgen.  
Ban this track:  
Titel-Informationen werden auf dem Last.fm-  
Server gespeichert und die Häufigkeit der  
Wiedergabe wird verringert.  
Add to My Favorites:  
Fügt einen Sender zu meiner My Favorites Liste hinzu.  
Artist Radio:  
Verwenden Sie q/w, um das Menü  
auszuwählen und dann drücken Sie ENTER.  
Search Station:  
2
Wählen Sie einen beliebigen Interpreten und wir  
spielen für Sie einen ganzen Radiosender mit durch  
Ihre Wahl inspirierter Musik.  
Sie können einen Sender anhand Interpreten,  
Tags oder Benutzernamen suchen.  
Top Artists Station:  
My Library:  
Lehnen Sie sich zurück und erfreuen Sie sich an  
einer Auswahl aller Musik, die Sie seit Ihrer  
Mitgliedschaft bei Last.fm gehört haben.  
Tag Radio:  
Polish Funk? Death Pop? Denken Sie an einen  
Musikstil und wir unterhalten Sie stundenlang damit.  
Scrobbling-Steuerung verwenden  
Sie können Titel der am besten bewerteten  
Interpreten wiedergeben.  
Top Tags Station:  
Sie können Titel der am besten bewerteten Tags  
wiedergeben.  
Verwenden Sie q/w, um „Enable“ auszuwählen und  
dann drücken Sie ENTER.  
*
Von Drittparteien zur Verfügung gestellte Internetradio-  
Dienste können unter Umständen ohne Vorankündigung  
eingestellt werden.  
Starten Sie Ihr kostenloses Probeabo direkt wenn Sie  
Ihr Konto erstellen und finden Sie selbst heraus wie es  
ist, jederzeit die Musik der ganzen Welt abrufen zu  
In bestimmten Gebieten sind Internetradio-Dienste  
eventuell nicht verfügbar.  
Y1212-1  
SN 29401479IREU  
* 2 9 4 0 1 4 7 9 I R E U *  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Remote Control Codes  
While holding down the REMOTE MODE button to which you want to assign a  
code, press and hold down [DISPLAY] (about 3 seconds).  
The REMOTE MODE button/Remote indicator lights.  
On Integra products, button names are capitalized. For example, “Remote Mode”  
button and “Display” button.  
Remote Control Codes  
/
1
2
Notes:  
• Remote control codes cannot be entered for [RECEIVER] and the multi zone button.  
• Only TV remote control codes can be entered for [TV].  
• Except for [RECEIVER], [TV], and the multi zone button, remote control codes from any  
category can be assigned for the REMOTE MODE buttons. However, these buttons also work  
as input selector buttons, so choose a REMOTE MODE button that corresponds with the input  
to which you connect your component. For example, if you connect your CD player to the CD  
input, choose [TV/CD] when entering its remote control code.  
Within 30 seconds, use the number buttons to enter the 5-digit remote control  
code.  
The REMOTE MODE button/Remote indicator flashes twice.  
If the remote control code is not entered successfully, the REMOTE MODE  
button/Remote indicator will flash once slowly.  
Notes:  
• The flashing element of the remote controller will differ according to your AV receiver’s model.  
• The remote controller is preconfigured with remote controller presets of different components.  
By entering a code from the Remote Control Code list, you can activate the relevant preset for  
that component.  
• When there are multiple codes related to one manufacturer, try and enter them one-by-one until  
it matches your component.  
• Depending on the model and year of your component, compatibility is not guaranteed.  
• With some models, the remote controller may not not work or its compatibility may be limited  
to part of the component’s functionality.  
• Besides, it is not possible to add new codes to the existing remote controller presets.  
• Though the provided remote control codes are correct at the time of printing, they are subject to  
change by the manufacturer.  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Codes de télécommande  
Códigos de control remoto  
Tout en maintenant enfoncé le bouton REMOTE MODE auquel vous souhaitez  
associer un code, pressez et maintenez enfoncé le bouton [DISPLAY] (pendant  
environ 3 secondes).  
Manteniendo pulsado el botón REMOTE MODE para el cual desea introducir un  
código, pulse y mantenga presionado el botón [DISPLAY] (aproximadamente 3  
segundos).  
1
1
Le bouton REMOTE MODE/le témoin Remote s’allume.  
Les noms de boutons sont en manjuscules sur les produits Integra. Par exemple, le  
bouton « Remote Mode » et le bouton « Display ».  
Remarques :  
Se iluminará el botón REMOTE MODE/indicador Remote.  
En los productos Integra, los nombres de los botones aparecen con mayúsculas. Por  
ejemplo, el botón “Remote Mode” y el botón “Display”.  
Notas:  
• Les codes de télécommande ne peuvent pas être entrés pour [RECEIVER] et le bouton multi  
zone.  
• No podrán introducirse códigos de mando a distancia para [RECEIVER] y el botón multizona.  
• Únicamente podrán introducirse códigos de mando a distancia de televisor para el botón [TV].  
• Con la excepción de [RECEIVER], [TV] y el botón multizona, se pueden asignar códigos de  
mando a distancia de cualquier categoría a los botones de REMOTE MODE. No obstante, estos  
botones también pueden funcionar como botones de selector de entrada; por tanto, seleccione  
un botón REMOTE MODE que se corresponda con la entrada a la cual está conectado el  
componente. Por ejemplo, si conecta un reproductor de CD a la entrada de CD, seleccione  
[TV/CD] cuando introduzca su código de mando a distancia.  
• Seul les code de télécommande de téléviseurs peuvent être entrés pour [TV].  
• À l’exception de [RECEIVER], [TV] et du bouton multi zone, vous pouvez affecter des codes  
de télécommande de n’importe quelle catégorie pour les boutons REMOTE MODE. Cependant,  
ces boutons font également office de bouton de sélecteur d’entrée : par conséquent, choisissez  
un bouton REMOTE MODE correspondant à l’entrée à laquelle vous souhaitez raccorder votre  
appareil. Par exemple, si vous raccordez votre lecteur CD à l’entrée CD, choisissez [TV/CD]  
lorsque vous saisissez le code de télécommande.  
Antes de que transcurran 30 segundos, utilice los botones numéricos para  
introducir el código de mando a distancia de 5 dígitos.  
El botón REMOTE MODE/indicador Remote parpadeará dos veces.  
Si el código de mando a distancia no se introduce correctamente, el botón REMOTE  
MODE/indicador Remote parpadeará una vez despacio.  
Notas:  
• El parpadeo del mando distancia será distinto según el modelo de receptor de AV.  
• El mando a distancia está preconfigurado con los ajustes predeterminados de los distintos  
componentes. Al introducir un código de la lista de códigos del mando a distancia se puede  
activar el ajuste predeterminado de ese componente.  
• Cuando hay múltiples códigos relacionados con un fabricante, pruebe a introducirlos uno a uno  
hasta que coincida con su componente.  
• Dependiendo del modelo y el año de su componente, la compatibilidad no está garantizada.  
• Con algunos modelos, es posible que el mando a distancia no funcione o que su compatibilidad  
esté limitada a una parte de las funciones del componente.  
2
Vous disposez de 30 secondes pour saisir le code de télécommande à cinq chiffres  
à l’aide des boutons numérotés.  
2
Le bouton REMOTE MODE/le témoin Remote clignote deux fois.  
Si le code de télécommande n’a pas été saisi correctement le bouton REMOTE  
MODE/l’indicateur Remote ne clignote qu’une seule fois.  
Remarques :  
• L’élément clignotant de la télécommande différera selon le modèle de votre ampli-tuner AV.  
• La télécommande est préconfigurée avec des préréglages de télécommande de différents  
appareils. En entrant un code de la liste des codes de télécommandes, vous pouvez activer le  
préréglage approprié pour cet appreil.  
• Quand il y a de multiples codes liés à un fabricant, essayez-les et entrez-les un par un jusqu’à ce  
que cela corresponde à votre appareil.  
• Selon le modèle et l’année de votre appareil, la compatibilité n’est pas garantie.  
• Avec certains modèles, la télécommande peut ne pas fonctionner ou sa compatibilité peut être  
limitée à une partie de la fonctionnalité de l’appareil.  
• Además, no es posible añadir nuevos códigos a los ajustes predeterminados existentes del  
mando a distancia.  
• Los códigos de mando a distancia suministrados son correctos en el momento de la impresión,  
pero el fabricante puede realizar cambios.  
• En outre, il n’est pas possible d’ajouter de nouveaux codes aux préréglages de télécommande  
existants.  
• Bien que les codes de télécommande fournis soient corrects au moment de l’impression de la  
liste, ils sont susceptibles d’être modifiés par le fabricant.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Codici del telecomando  
Fernbedienungscodes  
Tenendo premuto il tasto REMOTE MODE al quale si desidera assegnare il  
Halten Sie die REMOTE MODE-Taste gedruckt, fur die Sie den Code eingeben  
mochten, und drucken Sie (ca. 3 Sekunden lang) die [DISPLAY]-Taste.  
Die REMOTE MODE-Taste/Remote-Anzeige leuchtet.  
Bei den Integra-Produkten werden die Namen der Tasten groß geschrieben. Zum  
Beispiel „Remote Mode“ (Fernbedienungsmodus)-Taste und „Display“-Taste.  
Hinweise:  
1
1
codice, premere e tenere premuto [DISPLAY] (per circa 3 secondi).  
Il tasto REMOTE MODE/l'indicatore Remote si accende.  
Sui prodotti Integra, i nomi dei tasti sono scritti con l'iniziale maiuscola. Ad esempio,  
tasto “Remote Mode” e tasto “Display”.  
Note:  
• I codici di controllo del telecomando non possono essere inseriti per [RECEIVER] e i tasti multi  
zona.  
• Der Fernbedienungscode kann nicht [RECEIVER] und der Multi-Zonen-Taste zugeordnet  
werden.  
• Der Taste [TV] können nur Fernbedienungscodes für einen Fernseher zugeordnet werden.  
• Abgesehen von [RECEIVER], [TV] und der Multi-Zone-Taste, können die  
Fernbedienungscodes jeder Kategorie den REMOTE MODE-Tasten zugewiesen werden.  
Allerdings dienen diese Tasten auch als Quellenwahltasten. Wählen Sie also nach Möglichkeit  
eine REMOTE MODE-Taste, die dem Eingang zugeordnet ist, an den Sie die betreffende Quelle  
angeschlossen haben. Wenn Sie z.B. einen CD-Player an den CD-Eingang anschließen, sollten  
Sie [TV/CD] wenn Sie den Fernbedienungscode eingeben.  
• Per [TV] è possibile immettere solo codici telecomando del televisore.  
• Tranne che per [RECEIVER], [TV], e per il tasto multi zona, è possibile assegnare codici di  
controllo di ogni categoria per i tasti REMOTE MODE. Tuttavia, tali tasti fungono anche da  
tasti del selettore d'ingresso, quindi scegliere un tasto REMOTE MODE che corrisponda  
all'ingresso al quale viene collegato il dispositivo. Per esempio, se si collega il lettore CD  
all'ingresso CD, scegliere il [TV/CD] quando si immette il relativo codice telecomando.  
Entro 30 secondi utilizzare i tasti numerici per inserire il codice telecomando a 5  
cifre.  
2
Geben Sie mit den Zifferntasten innerhalb von 30 Sekunden den 5-stelligen  
Herstellercode ein.  
Die REMOTE MODE-Taste/Remote-Anzeige blinkt zwei Mal.  
Wenn der Fernbedienungscode nicht ordnungsgemäß eingegeben wurde, blinkt die  
REMOTE MODE-Taste/Remote-Anzeige einmal langsam.  
Hinweise:  
• Das blinkende Element auf der Fernbedienung unterscheidet sich je nach AV-Receiver-Modell.  
• Die Fernbedienung ist mit den Voreinstellungen der Fernbedienung der verschiedenen  
Komponenten vorkonfiguriert. Indem ein Code aus der Liste der Fernbedienungscodes  
eingegeben wird, können Sie die entsprechende Voreinstellung für die Komponente aktivieren.  
• Wenn es mehrere Codes gibt, die sich auf einen Hersteller beziehen, versuchen Sie sie einzeln  
einzugeben, bis einer mit Ihrer Komponente übereinstimmt.  
2
Il tasto REMOTE MODE/l'indicatore Remote lampeggia due volte.  
Se il codice telecomando non viene inserito correttamente, il tasto REMOTE  
MODE/l'indicatore Remote lampeggia lentamente una volta.  
Note:  
• L'elemento lampeggiante del telecomando varia a seconda del modello del ricevitore AV.  
• Il telecomando è preconfigurato con preselezioni per diversi apparecchi. Inserendo un codice  
dall'elenco dei codici telecomando, è possibile attivare la relativa preselezione per tale  
apparecchio.  
• Se sono presenti più codici relativi allo stesso produttore, provare a inserirli uno a uno finché  
non si arrivi al codice corrispondente dell'apparecchio.  
• A seconda del modello e dell'anno dell'apparecchio, la compatibilità non è garantita.  
• Con alcuni modelli, il telecomando può non funzionare o la sua compatibilità può essere limitata  
a una parte della funzionalità dell'apparecchio.  
• Dies hängt vom Modell und Herstellungsjahr Ihrer Komponente ab und die Kompatibilität ist  
nicht garantiert.  
• Es kann sein, dass bei einigen Modellen die Fernbedienung nicht funktioniert oder ihre  
Kompatibilität sich auf nur auf Teile der Funktionalität der Komponente beschränkt.  
• Abgesehen davon ist es nicht möglich, den bestehenden Voreinstellungen der Fernbedienung  
neue Codes hinzuzufügen.  
• Inoltre, non è possibile aggiungere nuovi codici alle preselezioni esistenti del telecomando.  
• I codici telecomando specificati sono validi alla data della stampa del presente documento, ma  
sono soggetti a variazioni da parte del produttore.  
• Obwohl die angegebenen Fernbedienungscodes dem Stand bei Drucklegung entsprechen, sind  
Änderungen durch den Hersteller vorbehalten.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Afstandsbedieningscodes  
Fjärrstyrningskoder  
Houd terwijl u de REMOTE MODE toets ingedrukt houdt waarvoor u een code  
Håll ned knappen för det REMOTE MODE som du vill tilldela en kod samtidigt  
som du trycker och håller ned [DISPLAY] (i cirka 3 sekunder).  
REMOTE MODE-knapp/Fjärrindikatorlampa.  
På Integra-produkter, är knappnamnens begynnelsebokstav en versal. Till exempel,  
”Fjärrläge”-knapp och ”Display”-knapp.  
1
1
wilt toewijzen de [DISPLAY] toets ingedrukt (ongeveer 3 seconden).  
De toets REMOTE MODE (afstandsbedieningsmodus) / Het indicatielampje  
afstandsbediening gaat branden.  
Op producten van Integra staan de namen van de toetesn in hoofdletters. Bijvoorbeeld,  
de toetsen “Remote Mode” en “Display”.  
Anmärkningar:  
Opmerkingen:  
• Fjärrkontrollkoder kan inte anges för knapparna [RECEIVER] och flerzonsknappen.  
• Endast fjärrkontrollkoder för tv kan anges för [TV].  
• Er kunnen geen afstandsbedieningscodes worden ingevoerd voor [RECEIVER] en de multi  
zone-toets.  
• Förutom [RECEIVER], [TV] och flerzonsknappen, kan fjärrkontrollkoder för vilken som helst  
kategori tilldelas för knapparna REMOTE MODE. Dessa knappar fungerar dock även som  
ingångväljarknappar, så använd en knapp för REMOTE MODE som motsvarar ingången som  
du ansluter utrustningen till. Till exempel, om du ansluter din CD-spelare till CD-ingången ska  
du välja [TV/CD] när du anger dess fjärrkontrollkod.  
• Alleen TV afstandsbedieningscodes kunnen worden ingevoerd voor [TV].  
• Behalve voor [RECEIVER], [TV] en de multi zone-toets, kunnen afstandsbedieningscodes  
vanuit elke categorie worden toegewezen aan de REMOTE MODE toetsen. Deze toetsen  
werken overigens ook als ingangsselectortoetsen, kies dus een REMOTE MODE toets die  
overeenkomt met de ingang waarop u uw component wilt aansluiten. Kies indien u bijvoorbeeld  
uw CD-speler aansluit op de CD-ingang de [TV/CD] toets bij het invoeren van de  
afstandsbedieningscode.  
Använd sifferknapparna för att ange den femsiffriga koden inom 30 sekunder.  
REMOTE MODE-knapp/Fjärrindikatorlampa blinkar två gånger.  
Om fjärrkontrollkoden inte ställdes in, blinkar REMOTE MODE-  
knappen/fjärrindikatorn långsamt en gång.  
2
Gebruik binnen 30 seconden de cijfertoetsen om de 5-cijferige  
afstandsbedieningscode in te voeren.  
2
Anmärkningar:  
De toets REMOTE MODE (afstandsbedieningsmodus) / Het indicatielampje  
afstandsbediening knippert tweemaal.  
Indien de afstandsbedieningscode niet met succes wordt ingevoerd, zal de toets  
REMOTE MODE/Remote-indicator eenmaal traag knipperen.  
Opmerkingen:  
• Het knippergedeelte van de afstandsbediening zal verschillen ten opzichte van het model van  
uw AV-receiver.  
• De afstandsbediening is voorgeprogrammeerd met voorkeuzetoetsen van verschillende  
componenten. Door het invullen van een code uit de afstandsbediening codelijst kunt u de  
voorkeuzetoets voor die component activeren.  
• Det blinkande elementet på fjärrkontrollen skiljer sig åt beroende på din modell av AV-receiver.  
• Fjärrkontrollen har förkonfigurerats med förvalda kanaler på fjärrkontrollen för olika  
komponenter. Genom att ange en kod från fjärrkontrollkodlistan, kan du aktivera relevanta  
förvalda kanaler för den utrustningen.  
• När det finns flera olika koder för en tillverkare ska du försöka att ange dem en och en tills de  
stämmer överens med din utrustning.  
• Beroende på utrustningens modell och årgång, går det inte att garantera kompatibilitet.  
• På vissa modeller kan det hända att fjärrkontrollen inte fungerar eller så kan dess kompatibilitet  
vara begränsad till en del av utrustningens funktion.  
• Dessutom går det inte att lägga till nya koder till fjärrkontrollens existerande förvalda kanaler.  
• Även om erhållna fjärrkontrollkoder är korrekta vid tryckningen, kan de ändras av tillverkaren.  
• Wanneer er meerdere codes gerelateerd zijn aan één fabrikant, probeer deze dan een voor een  
totdat de juiste code overeenkomt met uw component.  
• Afhankelijk van het model en het bouwjaar van uw component is de compatibiliteit niet  
gegarandeerd.  
• Bij sommige modellen werkt de afstandsbediening mogelijk niet of is de compatibiliteit ervan  
beperkt tot een deel van de functionaliteit van de component.  
Daarnaast is het niet mogelijk om nieuwe codes aan de bestaande voorkeuzetoetsen van de  
afstandsbediening toe te voegen.  
• Hoewel de gegeven afstandsbedieningscodes correct zijn op het moment van afdrukken, kunnen  
deze door de fabrikant gewijzigd worden.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
遙控代碼  
在按住想指定編碼的 REMOTE MODE (遙控模式)按鈕時,同時按住  
遥控代码  
按住想指定编码的 REMOTE MODE遥控模式)按钮的同时,按[DISPLAY  
(显示)]大约 3 秒钟。  
1
1
[DISPLAY] (顯示約 3 秒。  
REMOTE MODE (遙控模式)按鈕 / 遙控指示燈亮起。  
在 Integra 系列產品上,按鈕名稱為大寫。例如Remote Mode遙控模式)  
按鈕和 「Display顯示)按鈕。  
REMOTE MODE遥控模式)按/控指示灯亮起。  
Integra 产品上的按钮名称单词首字母大写。例如Remote Mode遥控模  
按钮Display显示按钮。  
注意:  
注意:  
[RECEIVER接收机)]多区域按钮不能输入遥控编码。  
只能[TV电视)]入电视遥控编码。  
[RECEIER] (接收機)和多區域按鈕不能輸入遙控編碼。  
您只能為 [TV] (電視)輸入電視遙控編碼。  
除 [RECEIVER] (接收機[TV] (電視)和多區域按鈕外,您可針對 REMOTE MODE  
(遙控模式)按鈕指定任何類別的遙控編碼。但是,這些按鈕仍可用作為輸入選擇器按  
鈕,因此,請選擇與您設備所連接輸入接口對應的 REMOTE MODE 按鈕。例如,如果  
要將 CD 播放機連接到 CD 輸入源上,則需在輸入遙控編碼時選擇 [TV/CD]。  
[RECEIVER接收机)]、[TV电视)]多区域按钮外,不能为 REMOTE MODE遥  
控模式)按钮指定任何类别的遥控编码是,这些按钮仍可用作输入选择器按钮,因  
择与设备所要连接的输入端对应的 REMOTE MODE(遥控模式果  
要将 CD 播放机连接到 CD 输入端,应在输入遥控编码时选[TV/CD/CD)]。  
在 30 秒內,使用數字按鈕輸入 5 位數的遙控編碼。  
REMOTE MODE (遙控模式)按鈕 / 遙控指示燈閃爍兩次。  
如果無法成功輸入遙控編碼,REMOTE MODE (遙控模式)按鈕 / 遙控指示燈  
會慢慢地閃爍一次。  
REMOTE MODE遥控模式)按/控指示灯闪烁两次。  
如果不能顺利输入遥控编码,REMOTE MODE遥控模式)按/控指示灯会  
缓慢闪烁一次。  
2
2
注意:  
注意:  
視您的 AV 接收機型號而定,遙控器的閃爍元件會有不同。  
遙控器已預先設定有不同設備的遙控器預設值。透過輸入遙控編碼清單中的編碼,您  
可啟用該設備的相關預設值。  
根据 AV 接收机产品类型的不同,遥控器闪烁元素将会不同。  
遥控器采用不同设备的遥控器预设进行预配置。通过从遥控器编码列表输入编码,便  
可激活相应设备的相关预设。  
當有多個編碼與單一製造商相關時,請嘗試一個接著一個輸入,直到與您的設備對應  
為止。  
单个制造商关联多个编码时,请尝试逐个输入,直至符合当前设备。  
根据设备的产品类型和年份的不同,无法保证兼容性。  
視設備的型號和年份而定,並不保證與本公司產品相容。  
在某些型號上,遙控器可能無法作用,或是其相容性限於部份設備功能。  
除此之外,您無法新增編碼至現有的遙控器預設值。  
对于某些产品类型,遥控器可能无法工作或其兼容性可能受到部分设备功能性的限制。  
此外,可能无法将新的编码追加到现有的遥控器预设。  
尽管付印时所提供的遥控编码是正确的,但制造商会随时更改。  
雖然所提供之遙控編碼在本文件列印時為正確,製造商仍可能會對其作出修改。  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Cable/PVR Combination  
Cable Set Top Box  
ADB  
Cable Set Top Box  
Neuf TV  
Noos  
Cable Set Top Box  
Visiopass  
02254, 02769  
02769  
03107  
00817  
01376  
01877  
Time Warner  
UPC  
01376, 01877, 02187  
01582  
Aon  
00817  
VTR  
Arris  
02187  
NTL  
01068, 01060  
02767  
WideOpenWest  
Ziggo  
Videotron  
VTR  
01877  
AT&T  
00858  
Numericable  
Ono  
00660, 01666, 02015,  
02142, 02447, 02774  
01376  
Bright House  
BT Vision  
Cable & Wireless  
Cable One  
Cablecom  
Cablevision  
Charter  
01376, 01877  
02294  
01068, 01562  
01060  
WideOpenWest  
Ziggo  
01877  
Optus  
02142  
Cable/PVR Combination  
01068  
Orange  
Pace  
00817  
Arris  
02187  
IPTV  
01376, 01877  
01582  
01376, 01877, 01068,  
01060, 01982  
Bright House  
Cable One  
Cablevision  
Charter  
01376, 01877  
01376, 01877  
01376, 01877  
01376, 01877, 02187  
01877, 01982  
ADB  
02254, 02769  
02769  
Panasonic  
Philips  
01488, 01982  
Aon  
01376, 01877  
01376, 01877, 02187  
00817, 01582, 02294,  
02767  
AT&T  
BT Vision  
Canal+  
Cisco  
00858  
02294  
Cisco  
01877, 00858, 01982,  
02345, 02378  
Pioneer  
RCN  
01877, 01500  
01376  
Cisco  
02657  
Comcast  
01376, 01877, 01982,  
02187  
Com Hem  
Comcast  
00817, 00660, 01666,  
02015, 02447  
00858, 02345, 02378  
01385  
Rogers  
Sagem  
Samsung  
01877  
Kreatel  
mio TV  
Motorola  
Cox  
01376, 01877  
02187  
01376, 01877, 01982,  
02187  
00817  
02802  
Digeo  
01877, 01060, 01666,  
02015, 02774  
01376, 00858, 01998,  
02378  
Cox  
01376, 01877  
01877  
Freebox  
Humax  
01482  
Daeryung  
Digeo  
Scientific Atlanta  
01877, 00858, 01982,  
02345  
02142, 03051, 03053  
01376, 01877  
03051, 03053  
01877  
Neuf TV  
Pace  
03107  
02187  
Insight  
02657  
SFR  
03107  
DX Antenna  
France Telecom  
Freebox  
Fujitsu  
01500  
J:COM  
Scientific Atlanta  
SFR  
00858, 02345  
03107  
Shaw  
01376  
00817  
Knology  
Mediacom  
Motorola  
Moxi  
SingTel  
Sony  
01998, 02802  
01460  
01482  
01376, 01877  
01376  
SingTel  
01998, 02802  
01385  
01497  
TeliaSonera  
Telus  
Stofa  
02015  
Humax  
00660, 02142, 02447,  
03051, 03053  
02187  
02345  
Suddenlink  
Sumitomo  
Telewest  
TeliaSonera  
Telus  
01376, 01877  
01500  
Numericable  
Pace  
02767  
Thomson  
Verizon  
02769  
Insight  
01376, 01877  
03051, 03053  
01877  
01877  
02378  
J:COM  
01068  
Panasonic  
Philips  
01982  
Knology  
Kreatel  
01385  
01582, 02767  
01877  
IPTV/PVR Combination  
01385  
02345  
Pioneer  
ADB  
02769  
Macab  
00817  
Thomson  
Time Warner  
Toshiba  
UPC  
01582, 01982, 02769  
01376, 01877, 02187  
01509  
Rogers  
01877  
Aon  
02769  
Mediacom  
mio TV  
Motorola  
01376, 01877  
02802  
Samsung  
Scientific Atlanta  
Shaw  
01877  
AT&T  
BT Vision  
Cisco  
00858  
01877, 01982  
01376  
02294  
01376, 00858, 01562,  
01982, 01998, 02378  
01582  
00858, 02345, 02378  
01385  
Verizon  
Videotron  
Virgin Media  
02378  
Suddenlink  
Thomson  
01376, 01877  
01582  
Kreatel  
Motorola  
Moxi  
NEC  
02187  
01496  
01877  
00858, 02378  
01068, 01060  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
IPTV/PVR Combination  
CD  
CD  
MD  
Neuf TV  
Philips  
03107  
Harman/Kardon  
Hitachi  
Integra  
JVC  
70157  
Rotel  
70157  
Onkyo  
Sony  
70868  
02294  
00858  
03107  
02378  
70032  
SAE  
70157  
70490, 70000  
72977  
Scientific Atlanta  
SFR  
71817, 70101  
70072  
Sansui  
70157  
TEAC  
Yamaha  
SAST  
70157  
70490  
Verizon  
Kenwood  
Krell  
70626, 70157, 70036  
70157  
Siemens  
Silsonic  
Simaudio  
Sonic Frontiers  
Sony  
70157  
Cassette Deck  
Aiwa  
70036  
CD/Cassette Dock  
40029  
40076  
40029  
40029  
40076  
40029  
40029  
40070  
40244  
40070  
40029  
40029  
40029  
42157  
40027  
40029  
40027  
40029  
40029  
40027  
40029  
40029  
40243  
40029  
40244  
40027, 40029  
40097  
Linn  
70157  
70157  
TASCAM  
73095  
Arcam  
Loewe  
Magnavox  
Marantz  
Matsui  
MCS  
70157  
70157  
Audiolab  
Carver  
70157  
70490, 70000  
70157  
CD  
70626, 70029, 70157  
70157  
Sylvania  
TAG McLaren  
Tandy  
Advantage  
AH!  
70032  
70157  
70157  
70157  
70157  
70157  
70157  
70157  
70157  
70157  
70157  
Denon  
70157  
Grundig  
Harman/Kardon  
Inkel  
70029  
70032  
Aiwa  
Memorex  
Meridian  
Micromega  
Miro  
70032  
TASCAM  
TEAC  
73533, 73095  
73531, 73551, 73532  
70029, 70303  
70157  
Arcam  
70157  
Atoll Electronique  
Audio Research  
Audiolab  
Audiomeca  
Audioton  
AVI  
JVC  
70157  
Technics  
Thorens  
Thule Audio  
Traxdata  
Universum  
Victor  
Kenwood  
Magnavox  
Marantz  
Myryad  
Onkyo  
70000  
Mission  
Myryad  
NAD  
70157  
70157  
70157  
70626  
70000, 70721  
70157  
70157  
Naim  
70072  
Balanced Audio  
Technology  
Optimus  
Philips  
NSM  
70157  
Wards  
70000, 70032, 70157  
70490, 70032, 70036  
70157  
Onkyo  
Optimus  
Panasonic  
Philips  
Pioneer  
Polk Audio  
Primare  
Proton  
71817  
Yamaha  
Zonda  
Cairn  
70157  
Pioneer  
Polk Audio  
Radiola  
RCA  
70000, 70032  
70029, 70303  
70626, 70157  
70032, 70101  
70157  
California Audio Labs 70029, 70303  
Cambridge  
Cambridge Audio  
Carver  
70157  
CD-R  
70157  
Denon  
JVC  
70626, 70766  
70072  
70157  
Revox  
CCE  
70157  
Kenwood  
Marantz  
Onkyo  
Philips  
Sony  
70626  
Sansui  
70157  
Cyrus  
70157  
70626  
Sony  
70157  
Denon  
70626, 70766  
70000  
71323  
Thorens  
Victor  
QED  
70157  
DKK  
70626  
Quad  
70157  
DMX Electronics  
Dynaco  
70157  
70000  
Wards  
Quasar  
Radiola  
RCA  
70029  
70157  
TASCAM  
71830, 72304  
Yamaha  
70157  
Genexxa  
Goldmund  
Grundig  
70000, 70032  
70157  
70032  
CD-R/MD  
Accessory  
Restek  
Revox  
70157  
70157  
TASCAM  
73511  
Apple  
81115  
70157  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Accessory  
Jamo  
Satellite Set Top Box  
Satellite Set Top Box  
Satellite Set Top Box  
82228  
Alba  
01284  
Centrex  
CGV  
01457  
Durabrand  
Echostar  
01284  
Logitech  
Onkyo  
82182  
Allvision  
Amstrad  
01334  
01413, 01567  
01334, 01626  
01176  
00775, 00853, 01323,  
01409, 02527  
82990, 81993, 82351  
82228  
00847, 01175, 01662,  
01693  
Chess  
Eco-Star  
Edision  
01413  
Polk Audio  
CityCom  
Clatronic  
Clayton  
Com Hem  
Comag  
Comsat  
Coship  
Crown  
Ansonic  
Arnion  
02418  
01631  
01413  
01300  
Elap  
01413, 01567  
02418  
Video - Accessory  
ADB  
01626  
ASCI  
01334  
Elbe  
02254, 02769  
02769  
01176, 01915  
01413  
AssCom  
Astro  
00853  
Energy Sistem  
Engel  
01631, 02418  
01251  
Aon  
00173, 01100  
02418  
Apple  
02615  
01413  
Atlanta  
Atsat  
EuroLine  
Europhon  
Europsat  
Expressvu  
Fagor  
01251  
AT&T  
00858  
01457  
01300  
01334  
BT Vision  
Canal+  
02294  
01284  
AtSky  
01334  
01413, 01611  
00775  
02657  
CS  
01631  
Audiola  
Aurora  
02418  
Cisco  
00858, 02345, 02378  
01385  
Cyfra+  
Cyfrowy Polsat  
D-box  
01409  
00879, 00642, 01433  
00879, 00642, 01259  
01631  
01611  
Kreatel  
00853, 02527  
00723, 01114  
01626  
Austar  
Ferguson  
Finlux  
01291  
mio TV  
Motorola  
02802  
Avanit  
01626  
01376, 00858, 01998,  
02378  
Dantax  
Denver  
Dgtec  
Awa  
02418  
Fly Com  
FMD  
01457  
02418  
Neuf TV  
Pace  
03107  
Axil  
01413, 01457, 02418  
01626  
01413, 01457  
00879, 01176, 01356  
02408  
01631, 02418  
02418  
02657  
Axitronic  
Balmet  
Bell ExpressVu  
Belson  
Foxtel  
Dick Smith  
Electronics  
Philips  
02294  
01457  
Freesat  
Scientific Atlanta  
SFR  
00858, 02345  
03107  
00775  
Digi Raum Electronics 01176  
Fuba  
00173, 01251  
00853, 00879  
01176  
02418  
Digiality  
Digihome  
DigiLogic  
DigiQuest  
Digisky  
01334  
Galaxis  
SingTel  
TeliaSonera  
Telus  
01998, 02802  
01385  
Big Sat  
Black Diamond  
Blaupunkt  
Boshmann  
Boston  
01457  
01284  
General Satellite  
Globo  
01284  
01284  
01251, 01334, 01626  
00775  
02345  
00173  
01300, 01457, 01631  
01457  
GOI  
Thomson  
Verizon  
02769  
01413, 01631  
01251  
Gold Box  
Gold Vision  
GoldMaster  
Goodmans  
Gradiente  
Grandin  
Grocos  
00853  
02378  
DigitalBox  
Digiwave  
DirecTV  
Dish Network  
Dishpro  
01100, 01631  
01631  
01631  
Boxer  
01458  
01334  
Receiver  
British Sky  
00847, 01175, 01662  
01377, 00099  
00775  
01284, 01291  
00099, 00887  
01626  
Onkyo  
52503  
Broadcasting  
BskyB  
00847, 01175, 01662  
01284, 01291, 01626  
00853, 01334  
00775  
Satellite Set Top Box  
Bush  
DishTV  
01300  
01409, 01457  
@sat  
01300  
Canal Digital  
Canal Satellite  
Canal+  
DRE  
01176  
Grundig  
00847, 00853, 00173,  
00879, 01284, 01291  
@Sky  
01334  
00853, 02657  
Dream Multimedia  
DSE  
01237  
Acoustic Solutions  
ADB  
01284  
00853, 02657  
Haier  
Hallo  
02418  
01626  
02280, 02418  
00879, 00642, 01433  
00642, 00887, 01259  
01626  
CanalSat  
00853, 02657  
DSTV  
Akura  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Satellite Set Top Box  
Satellite Set Top Box  
Satellite Set Top Box  
Satellite Set Top Box  
Hama  
01567  
Leiko  
01626  
Pace  
00847, 00853, 00887,  
01175, 01323, 01356,  
01423, 01662, 01693,  
01850, 02059, 02060,  
02211, 02657  
Sat Industrie  
SAT+  
01611  
Hanseatic  
Hirschmann  
Hitachi  
Hornet  
01100  
00173  
01284  
01300  
00775  
Lemon  
01334  
01409  
Lenoxx  
Linsar  
01611  
Satplus  
01100  
01284  
SatyCon  
01631  
Listo  
01626  
Schaub Lorenz  
Schneider  
Schwaiger  
Sedea Electronique  
SEG  
02418  
Pacific  
01284  
HTS  
Lodos  
01284  
01206, 01251  
01334, 01457, 01631  
01206, 01626  
01251, 01284, 01626  
01611  
Palcom  
Panasat  
Panasonic  
01409, 01611  
00879, 01433  
Humax  
01377, 01176, 01427,  
01675, 01808, 01882,  
01915, 02144, 02408,  
02616  
Logik  
01284  
Macab  
00853  
00847, 01304, 01404,  
03099  
Manhattan  
Maspro  
Matsui  
01300  
Panda  
Pass  
00173  
00173  
Servimat  
ServiSat  
ID Digital  
ID Sat  
01176  
01567  
00173, 01284, 01626  
01334  
01251  
01334  
peeKTon  
Philips  
01457, 02418  
Maximum  
Mediabox  
Mediacom  
MediaSat  
Medion  
MegaSat  
Metronic  
Shark  
01631  
ILLUSION sat  
Imperial  
Indovision  
iNETBOX  
Inno Hit  
Innova  
01631  
01114, 00887, 00133,  
02211  
00853  
Sherwood  
Siemens  
01409  
01195, 01334  
00887  
01206  
00173, 01334, 01626,  
02418  
00853  
01237  
Phoenix  
Pino  
02418  
Sigmatek  
SKY  
02418  
01334, 01626  
01631  
01626  
01334  
00099, 00847, 00887,  
01175, 01662, 01693,  
01850, 02754  
00099  
Pioneer  
PMB  
00853, 01308  
01611  
01334, 01413, 01631,  
02418  
inVion  
02418  
iotronic  
01413  
SKY Brazil  
SKY Deutschland  
SKY Italia  
00887  
Premiere  
Pro Basic  
Proline  
QNS  
00723  
Metz  
00173  
ISkyB  
00887  
02754  
00853  
Moserbaer  
Movistar  
Multichoice  
01251  
ITT  
02418  
00853, 01693, 01850  
02211  
01284  
02527, 02761  
ITT Nokia  
Jadeworld  
Jaeger  
00723  
SKY New Zealand  
SKY PerfecTV!  
Sky XL  
01404  
00879, 00642, 01433,  
02059, 02060  
00642  
02299, 02616, 03099  
01251  
RCA  
01291  
01334  
Regal  
01251  
MySky  
NEOTION  
Netsat  
01356, 01693, 01850  
01334  
JVC  
00775  
Sky+  
01175, 01662  
Roadstar  
Rollmaster  
Rownsonic  
SAB  
00853  
KabelBW  
Kaon  
01195, 01882, 01915  
01300  
Skymaster  
01334, 01409, 01567,  
01611  
01413  
00099, 00887  
00723  
01567  
Nikko  
Skymax  
Skyplus  
01413  
Kathrein  
Kenwood  
Koenig  
00173, 01561, 01567  
00853  
01251, 01300, 01631  
01114  
Nokia  
00853, 00723, 01223  
01611  
01175, 01334  
01100  
Sagem  
Saivod  
Samsung  
Nordmende  
NPG  
SkySat  
01631  
02418  
01631  
Skyvision  
SM Electronic  
Smart  
01334  
Kreiling  
Kreiselmeyer  
L&S Electronic  
LaSAT  
01626  
01377, 00853, 01175,  
01206, 01458, 01662,  
02986  
Onn  
01284  
01409  
00173  
Optex  
01413, 01611, 01626  
00879, 01356  
01334  
01404, 01413, 01631  
01457  
01334  
Optus  
Sansui  
01251  
01626  
01300  
SmartVision  
Sony  
00173  
Orbis  
Sanyo  
00847, 00853, 01558,  
02299  
Lava  
01631  
Orbitech  
01100, 01195  
Sat Control  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Satellite Set Top Box  
Satellite Set Top Box  
SAT/PVR Combination  
SAT/PVR Combination  
Star  
00887  
UBC  
00642  
Canal+  
02657  
SKY Deutschland  
SKY Italia  
SKY New Zealand  
SKY PerfecTV!  
Sky+  
02754  
Stream System  
Strong  
01300  
UEC  
00879, 01356  
01251, 01626, 02418  
01882  
CanalSat  
02657  
01693, 01850  
02211  
00853, 00879, 01284,  
01300, 01409, 01626,  
02418  
United  
Cyfrowy Polsat  
DigiQuest  
DirecTV  
02527  
Unitymedia  
Universum  
Variosat  
VEA  
01300  
02299, 03099  
01662  
00173, 01251  
00173  
01377, 00099, 20739  
00775  
Sunny  
01300  
Dish Network  
Dishpro  
Skyplus  
01175, 01334  
01631  
Sunstar  
00642  
02418  
00775  
Smart  
Supernova  
Supratech  
Systec  
00887  
Vestel  
01251, 01284  
01195  
Dream Multimedia  
Echostar  
01237  
Sony  
02299  
01413  
Viasat  
00775, 02527  
01631  
Stream System  
Strong  
01300  
01334  
Vision  
01626  
Edision  
01300  
Sytech  
02418  
Visiosat  
Vitecom  
Vivax  
01413, 01457  
01413  
Expressvu  
Foxtel  
00775  
Sunny  
01300  
TBoston  
TEAC  
01251, 02418  
01251  
01356  
TechniSat  
Technosat  
Telefonica  
Telestar  
01195  
02418  
Humax  
01176, 01427, 01675,  
01808  
01206  
Technical  
Technika  
TechniSat  
Technosat  
Techwood  
TELE System  
Telefonica  
Telestar  
01626  
Volcasat  
Wavelength  
Wharfedale  
Wisi  
02418  
02527  
01284  
ID Sat  
01334  
01413  
01195  
01100, 01195  
01206  
iNETBOX  
Kaon  
01237  
01284  
Thomson  
Topfield  
01175, 01662  
01206  
01300  
00173  
01251, 01284, 01626  
01251, 01409, 01611  
02527, 02761  
Kathrein  
Maximum  
Mediacom  
MegaSat  
Movistar  
Multichoice  
MySky  
01561  
Worldsat  
Woxter  
Xsat  
01251  
Viasat  
01195  
01334  
02418  
Xtreme  
01300  
01206  
00847, 01323  
01300  
01100, 01195, 01251,  
01334, 01626  
01631  
Television  
A.R. Systems  
Accent  
Xtreme  
Yakumo  
Yes  
02527  
10556, 10037  
10037  
01413  
Televes  
Televisa  
Tevion  
01300, 01334  
00887  
02059, 02060  
01356, 01693, 01850  
01334  
00887  
Acer  
11339  
Zehnder  
01251, 01334, 01413,  
01631  
01409  
NEOTION  
Pace  
Acoustic Solutions  
Action  
11037, 11667  
10650  
Thomson  
00847, 00853, 01175,  
01046, 01291, 01662  
Zinwell  
02280, 02761  
01175, 01356, 01423,  
01662, 01693, 01850,  
02059, 02060, 02211,  
02657  
Addison  
AEG  
10653  
Tonna  
Topfield  
Toshiba  
Trevi  
01611  
01206  
01284  
01251  
SAT/PVR Combination  
11037, 11324  
12719  
@sat  
01300  
Agfaphoto  
Aiko  
Panasonic  
Philips  
01304, 03099  
00099  
Amstrad  
Atsat  
01175, 01662, 01693  
01300  
10037  
Aim  
10037, 10499  
Triax  
00853, 01251, 01291,  
01413, 01611, 01626,  
01631  
Samsung  
01175, 01206, 01662  
01300  
Bell ExpressVu  
00775  
Akai  
10178, 10556, 10037,  
10714, 10715, 10208,  
11675  
Sat Control  
Schneider  
Sedea Electronique  
SKY  
British Sky  
Broadcasting  
01175, 01662  
01206  
Tricolor TV  
True Visions  
Twinner  
01176  
02408  
01611  
01206  
BskyB  
01175, 01662  
02657  
Akiba  
Akito  
10037  
10037  
01175, 01662, 01693,  
01850, 02754  
Canal Satellite  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Television  
Television  
Belstar  
Television  
Classic  
Television  
DMTech  
Domeos  
Drean  
Akura  
10171, 10037, 10714,  
10668, 11037, 11363,  
11585, 11667, 11709  
11037  
10499  
12001  
10668  
10037  
10698  
Beon  
10037  
Clatronic  
Clayton  
Condor  
10037, 10714, 11324  
11037  
Berthen  
10556, 10668  
10037  
Alba  
10037, 10714, 10668,  
11037, 11585  
Bestar  
10037  
DSE  
Bexa  
12493  
Conrowa  
Contec  
10698  
Dual  
10037, 11037, 11585,  
11667  
Alien  
11037  
Black Diamond  
Blaupunkt  
Blue Sky  
11037  
10037  
Allstar  
10037  
Durabrand  
10178, 10171, 10714,  
11037, 11652  
10195  
Cosmel  
CPTEC  
Crown  
10037  
Amstrad  
Anam  
10171, 10037, 11037  
10037  
10556, 10037, 10625,  
10714, 10668, 11037,  
10715, 10499, 11324,  
11363, 11652, 11709  
10625, 11363  
Dux  
10037  
10037, 10714, 10668,  
11037, 10715, 10208,  
11652  
Anam National  
Andersson  
Anitech  
Ansonic  
AOC  
10037, 10650  
11585  
DX Antenna  
Dynatron  
Dynex  
11817, 13817  
10037  
10037  
Boca  
11652  
Cyberpix  
D-Vision  
Daewoo  
11667  
12049  
10037, 10668  
10178, 10625, 11365  
10037, 10714  
10037  
Boman  
Bork  
11324  
10556, 10037  
e-motion  
E:max  
11709  
11363  
10178, 10556, 10037,  
10634, 10499, 12098  
11324  
Ardem  
BPL  
10037, 10208  
10625, 10714, 10560  
11709  
Easy Living  
ECE  
11666, 11709  
10037  
Arena  
Brandt  
Brimax  
Brinkmann  
Brionvega  
Bush  
Dansai  
Dantax  
10037, 10208  
Aristona  
ART  
10556, 10037  
11037  
10714, 11037, 10715,  
11652  
Elbe  
10556, 10037  
11755  
10037, 10668  
10037  
Electrograph  
Element  
Elfunk  
Datsura  
Dawa  
10208  
Art Mito  
Asberg  
Astra  
11585  
11886  
10037  
10037  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
10668, 11037, 10698,  
10208, 11585, 11652,  
11667, 12719  
11037  
Daytron  
De Graaf  
DEC  
10037  
10037  
ELG  
10037  
10208  
ATD  
10698  
Elin  
10037  
11709  
Atlantic  
Audiosonic  
Audioworld  
Aventura  
Axxon  
10037  
Elite  
10037  
Byd:sign  
Camper  
Carad  
12140, 12209  
10037  
Decca  
10037  
10037, 10714, 10715  
10698  
Emerson  
10178, 10171, 10037,  
10714, 10668, 11394,  
11864, 11886  
Denver  
Desmet  
Diamant  
Diamond  
10037, 11709  
10037  
10668, 11037  
10037  
10171  
Carena  
10037  
Envision  
Epson  
11365, 11506  
11379  
10714  
Carrefour  
Cascade  
Casio  
10037  
10698  
Baird  
10208  
10037  
Dick Smith  
Electronics  
10698  
Erres  
10037  
Barco  
10556  
10037  
ESA  
10171  
Basic Line  
10556, 10037, 10668,  
11037  
Cathay  
10037  
Digatron  
Digihome  
Digiline  
Digitek  
Digitor  
Dixi  
10037  
ESC  
10037  
CCE  
10037  
11667  
Baur  
10037, 10195, 10512  
10178  
Euroman  
Europa  
Europhon  
Evesham  
Excello  
Exquisit  
10037  
Centrum  
Centurion  
Changhong  
Chimei  
Clarivox  
11037  
10037, 10668  
11709  
Beaumark  
Beijing  
Beko  
10037  
10037  
10208  
10037  
10508  
10037, 10698  
10037  
10037, 10714, 10715,  
11652  
11248, 11667  
11037  
11666  
10037  
Belson  
10698  
DL  
11363  
10037  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Television  
Television  
Television  
Hoeher  
Television  
Karcher  
Kathrein  
Kendo  
Ferguson  
10037, 10625, 10560,  
10195, 11037, 11585  
Goodmans  
10556, 10037, 10625,  
10714, 10560, 10668,  
10634, 11037, 10499,  
11585, 11667  
10714  
10037  
11666  
11295  
10714, 11324  
10556  
Hornyphon  
Hugoson  
Humax  
Fidelity  
Finlandia  
Finlux  
10171, 10037, 10512  
10208  
10037, 11037, 11585  
11037  
Kennex  
Kioto  
Gorenje  
Gradiente  
Graetz  
11585  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
10715, 11248, 11667  
Hypson  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
10668, 11037, 10715  
10556  
10037  
Kiton  
10037, 10668  
10037  
10714  
Firstline  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
10668, 11037, 10208,  
11363  
Hyundai  
Iberia  
11037, 10698  
10037  
KLL  
Granada  
Grandin  
10037, 10560, 10208  
Kneissel  
Koenig  
Kolin  
10556, 10037, 10499  
10037  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
10668, 11037, 10715,  
11652  
ICE  
10037  
Fisher  
10208  
iLo  
11394  
10150, 10037, 11610,  
11755  
Flint  
10037  
Imperial  
Indiana  
Ingelen  
Inno Hit  
Innova  
Insignia  
Integra  
Interbuy  
Interfunk  
Internal  
Intervision  
Irradio  
IRT  
10037  
Grundig  
10556, 10037, 10195,  
11223, 11667, 12625  
Formenti  
Fraba  
10037  
10037  
Kolster  
Konka  
Korpel  
Kosmos  
Kunlun  
L&S Electronic  
Lavic  
10037  
10037  
GVA  
11363, 12098  
12001  
10714  
10037, 10714  
10037  
Friac  
10037, 10499  
11709  
H & B  
11037, 11585  
10037  
Fujicom  
Fujitsu  
Fujitsu Siemens  
Funai  
Haier  
10037, 10698, 10508  
10178  
10037  
10809  
Hallmark  
Hankook  
Hanseatic  
10171, 11423, 12049  
11807, 13100, 13500  
10037  
10208  
10809, 11248, 11666  
10178  
10714  
10171, 10714, 10668,  
11037, 11394, 11666,  
11817, 13817  
10556, 10037, 10625,  
10714, 10634, 10499,  
12001  
11363  
10037, 10512  
10556  
Lavis  
11037  
G-Hanz  
Gaba  
11363  
11037  
10037  
10037  
11755  
Lecson  
Lenco  
10037  
Hantarex  
Hantor  
10037  
10037  
10037, 11037  
10037  
10037  
Galaxi  
Galaxis  
Gateway  
GE  
10037  
Leyco  
Harwood  
Hauppauge  
HB  
10037  
10698  
LG  
10178, 10556, 10037,  
10714, 10715, 10698,  
11423, 11768, 11840,  
12182, 12358, 12424,  
12834  
10037  
Isukai  
ITS  
10037  
11324  
10178, 11454, 10625,  
10560  
10037  
HCM  
10037  
ITT  
10208  
Highline  
Hinari  
10037  
GEC  
10037  
ITT Nokia  
ITV  
10208  
Liesenkoetter  
Lifetec  
10037  
10037, 10208  
10714  
Genesis  
Genexxa  
GFM  
10037  
10037  
10037, 10714, 10668,  
11037, 12001  
Hisawa  
Hisense  
10037  
JGC  
11709  
10556, 10508, 10208,  
11363, 12098  
10171, 11864, 11886  
11585  
Linsar  
11585  
Jinfeng  
Jinxing  
JMB  
10208  
Godrej  
Goldfunk  
GoldStar  
Local India TV  
Local Malaysia TV  
Lodos  
10208  
10556, 10037, 10698  
10556, 10634, 10499  
10556  
Hitachi  
10150, 10178, 10037,  
10634, 11037, 10508,  
10499, 10578, 11576,  
11585, 11643, 11667,  
11691, 12433  
10668  
10698  
10178, 10037, 10714,  
10715  
11037  
Jubilee  
JVC  
Loewe  
10037, 10512, 11884  
11037, 10698  
10668  
10650, 10653, 10508,  
11428, 11601, 12271  
Logik  
Hitachi Fujian  
Hitec  
10150  
10698  
Kaisui  
10037  
Logix  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Television  
Luma  
Television  
Metronic  
Metz  
Television  
NetTV  
Television  
Orline  
11037  
10625  
11755  
10037  
Lumatron  
Lumenio  
Lux May  
Luxor  
10037, 10668  
10037  
10037, 10668, 10195,  
11037  
Neufunk  
New Tech  
Newave  
Nikkai  
10556, 10037, 10714  
10556, 10037  
10178  
Ormond  
Osaki  
10668, 11037  
10556, 10037  
10037  
MGA  
10150, 10178  
10037  
Osio  
Micromaxx  
10037, 10714, 10668,  
11037, 11324, 12001  
11037, 10208  
10178  
10037  
Osume  
10037  
LXI  
Nikkei  
10714  
Otto Versand  
10556, 10037, 10195,  
10512  
Microspot  
Mikomi  
11614  
M Electronic  
10037, 10714, 10634,  
10195, 10512, 11652  
Nikko  
10178  
11037, 11585  
10037  
Pacific  
10556, 10714, 11037,  
11324  
Nokia  
10208  
Minato  
Madison  
10037  
Norcent  
Nordmende  
11365  
Minerva  
10195, 11248  
11667  
Palladium  
Palsonic  
Panama  
10556, 10037, 10714  
10037, 10698  
10037  
Magnavox  
10171, 11454, 11365,  
11506, 11755, 11867,  
12372  
10037, 10714, 10560,  
10195, 11585, 11667,  
12001  
Ministry Of Sound  
Minoka  
10037  
Magnum  
Manesth  
Manhattan  
Marantz  
Mark  
10037, 10714, 10715  
10037  
Mirai  
11666  
Normerel  
Nortek  
Novatronic  
Novita  
Nu-Tec  
O.K.Line  
Oceanic  
Odys  
10037  
Panasonic  
11480, 10037, 10650,  
10508, 10208, 11636,  
12170  
Mitsubishi  
10150, 11250, 10178,  
10556, 10037, 11037,  
10512, 11171  
10668  
10037, 10668, 11037  
11454, 10556, 10037  
10037, 10714, 10715  
10499  
10037  
Panavision  
Panda  
10037  
11585  
Mivar  
10609  
10698, 10508, 10208  
11636  
10698  
Moree  
10037  
Pansonic  
Penney  
Perdio  
Master's  
Mastro  
11037, 11324  
10208  
Morgan's  
Moserbaer  
MTC  
10037  
10178  
10698  
11585  
10037  
Masuda  
Matsui  
10037  
12719  
10512  
Perfekt  
Petters  
10037  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
10195, 11037, 10208,  
11666, 11667  
Okano  
OKI  
10037  
MTlogic  
Mudan  
Multitec  
Multitech  
Myrica  
Myryad  
NAD  
10714  
10037  
11585, 11667  
11610, 12124  
10698  
10208  
Philco  
10178, 10171, 10037,  
11394  
Olevia  
Omni  
Matsushita  
Maxent  
Maxess  
Meck  
10650  
10037, 10668, 11037  
10037  
11755  
Philips  
10178, 10171, 11454,  
10556, 10037, 10512,  
10605, 10690, 11394,  
11506, 11867, 12372  
Onei  
11667  
12493  
11666  
Onida  
10653  
10698  
10556  
Onimax  
Onix  
10714  
Mediator  
Medion  
10556, 10037  
10178, 10037  
10037  
Phocus  
Phoenix  
Phonola  
Pioneer  
10714, 11652  
10037  
10698  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
10668, 11037, 10698,  
10512, 11248, 11585,  
11667, 12001, 12719  
Naiko  
Onkyo  
Onn  
11807, 13100, 13500  
11667, 11709  
11709  
Nakimura  
National  
NEC  
10037  
10556, 10037  
10508, 10208  
10037, 10698, 10512,  
11457, 11636, 12171  
Onyx  
10178, 10653, 10508,  
10499  
Megatron  
MEI  
10178  
Opera  
10037, 10714  
10650  
Plantron  
10037  
11037  
Optimus  
Orbit  
Neckermann  
NEI  
10556, 10037  
10037, 11037  
11324  
Playsonic  
10037, 10714, 10715,  
11652  
Memorex  
Mercury  
Mermaid  
10150, 10178, 11037  
10037  
10037  
Orion  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
11037, 12001  
Powerpoint  
Prinston  
10037, 10698  
11037, 10715  
NEO  
10037  
Netsat  
10037  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Television  
Profitronic  
Proline  
Television  
Rowa  
Television  
Siera  
Television  
Svasa  
10037  
10037, 10698  
10556, 10037  
10037  
10208  
10037, 10625, 10634,  
11037  
Saba  
10625, 10714, 10560  
10618  
Silva  
Swisstec  
Sylvania  
11614, 11775  
Sagem  
Saivod  
Salora  
Silva Schneider  
Silver  
10037  
10171, 11394, 11864,  
11886  
Prosonic  
10037, 10714, 10668,  
11324, 11585, 11667,  
11709, 12001  
10037, 10668, 11037  
10208, 12001  
10715  
Symphonic  
Synco  
10171, 11394  
10178, 11755  
11610  
SilverCrest  
Sinudyne  
SKY  
11037  
Sampo  
10178, 10171, 10650,  
11755  
10037  
Protech  
Proton  
10037, 10668, 11037  
10178  
Syntax  
Sysline  
Tacico  
Talent  
10037, 11614, 11775  
10037, 10698  
11324  
Samsung  
10178, 10556, 10037,  
10618, 10650, 10208,  
12051  
10037  
Skyworth  
Sliding  
ProVision  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
11324  
10178  
10178  
SLX  
10668  
Pvision  
Pye  
12001  
Sansui  
Sanyo  
10171, 10037, 10714,  
11248, 12001  
Tashiko  
Tatung  
TCL  
10650  
Solavox  
Soniko  
10037  
10556, 10037  
10208  
10037, 11248, 11324  
10037  
Qingdao  
Quasar  
Quelle  
11037, 10508, 10208,  
11142, 11365, 11585,  
11667, 11974  
10698, 12403, 12434,  
13183  
Soniq  
12493  
10650  
Sonitron  
Sonneclair  
Sonoko  
Sonolor  
Sontec  
10208  
10037, 10668, 10195,  
11037, 10512  
TCM  
10714, 12001  
SBR  
10556, 10037  
10037  
TEAC  
10178, 10171, 10037,  
10714, 10668, 11037,  
10698, 10512, 11248,  
11363, 11709, 11755  
Schaub Lorenz  
10714, 11324, 11363,  
11667, 12001  
R-Line  
10037  
10037  
Radiola  
10556, 10037  
10037  
10208  
Schneider  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
10668, 11037  
Radiomarelli  
RadioShack  
Radiotone  
RCA  
10037  
10178, 10037  
10037, 10668, 11037  
Tec  
10037  
Sony  
10810, 11505, 11167,  
11651, 11825  
Schoentech  
Scotch  
Scott  
11037  
Tech Line  
Technica  
Technics  
Technika  
TechniSat  
Technisson  
Techno  
10037, 10668  
11037  
10178  
Soundesign  
Soundwave  
Sowa  
10178  
10178, 11454, 10625,  
10560, 10618, 11781,  
12247, 12403, 12434,  
12746, 12932  
10178  
10037, 11037, 10715  
10178  
10556, 10650  
11667  
Sears  
10178, 10171  
10634  
Seaway  
Seelver  
SEG  
Squareview  
Standard  
Starlite  
10171  
10556  
Realistic  
Recor  
10178  
11037  
10037, 11037, 11709  
10037  
10714, 11652  
11585  
10037  
10037, 10668, 11037,  
12719  
Rectiligne  
Redstar  
Reflex  
10037  
Strato  
10037  
Technosonic  
10556, 10625, 10499,  
11324  
SEI  
10037  
10037  
10178  
10208  
10037  
SunBriteTV  
Sungoo  
11610  
Sei-Sinudyne  
Serie Dorada  
Shanghai  
Sharp  
10037, 10668, 11037  
11585  
Techvision  
Techwood  
Tecnimagen  
Teco  
11709  
11248  
Relisys  
Remotec  
Reoc  
11037, 11667  
10556  
Sunny  
10037  
10171, 10037  
10714  
Sunstar  
10037  
10650, 10818, 11165,  
11423, 11659  
10178, 10653  
10208, 11709  
10150  
Sunstech  
Sunwood  
Supersonic  
SuperTech  
Supra  
12001  
Revox  
10037  
Tedelex  
10037  
Shintoshi  
Shivaki  
Siam  
10037  
RFT  
10037  
Teknika  
10208  
10178, 10037  
10037  
Roadstar  
10037, 10714, 10668,  
11037, 10715  
TELE System  
Telecor  
11585  
10556, 10037  
10178  
10037  
Siemens  
10037, 10195  
Rolson  
12001, 12098  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Television  
Television  
Ultravox  
UMC  
Television  
PVR  
Telefunken  
10037, 10625, 10714,  
10560, 10698, 11585,  
11667  
10037  
Wharfedale  
10556, 10037, 11324,  
11667  
ReplayTV  
Sonic Blue  
TiVo  
20616  
20616  
20739  
11614, 11775  
10037  
White Westinghouse 10037  
Unic Line  
Uniden  
Telefusion  
Telegazi  
Telemeister  
Telesonic  
Telestar  
10037  
Wilson  
10556  
12122  
10037  
Windsor  
Windy Sam  
Wintel  
10668, 11037  
10556  
TV/VCR Combination  
United  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
11037, 10715, 11652  
10037  
Amstrad  
Ferguson  
Fidelity  
GoldStar  
Grundig  
LG  
10171  
10037  
Unitek  
11709  
10714  
10625  
10556, 10037  
10037, 10668, 11037  
10037  
Universal  
Universum  
10037, 10714  
World-of-Vision  
Wyse  
12001  
10171  
Teletech  
Teleview  
Tennessee  
Tensai  
10037, 10668, 10195,  
11037, 10618, 10512  
11365  
10037  
Xenius  
10634  
10556, 10037, 10195  
10178  
10037  
Univox  
10037  
Xiahua  
10698  
10037, 11037, 10715  
V7 Videoseven  
Vestel  
11666, 11755  
XLogic  
10698  
Mitsubishi  
Philips  
Radiola  
Saba  
10556  
Tesla  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
11037, 11652  
10037, 10668, 11037,  
11585, 11667  
Xrypton  
Yamaha  
Yamishi  
Yokan  
10037  
10556, 10037  
10556  
10650, 11576  
10037  
Tevion  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
10668, 11037, 11248,  
11585, 11667  
Vexa  
10037  
10625  
Victor  
10650, 10653, 11428  
10037, 10508  
10037  
10037  
Sanyo  
11974  
Videocon  
VideoSystem  
Vidtech  
Viewsonic  
Vision  
Yoko  
10037  
Schneider  
Sharp  
10556, 10037  
10818  
Thomson  
Thorn  
10037, 10625, 10560  
10037, 10499, 10512  
10499  
YU-MA-TU  
Zenith  
10037  
10178  
10178, 10037, 11365,  
11423, 12358  
Siemens  
Sony  
10037  
Thorn-Ferguson  
TMK  
11365, 11755, 12049  
10037  
11505  
10178  
Zepto  
Zonda  
11585  
10698  
TEAC  
10178, 10171  
10556  
Tokai  
10037, 10668, 11037  
11037  
Vistron  
Vivax  
11363  
Technics  
Thomson  
Tokaido  
Topline  
Toshiba  
11709  
10625  
10668, 11037  
Vizio  
11758, 12209  
10037  
VCR  
10195, 11037, 10618,  
10650, 10508, 11169,  
11508, 11524, 11652,  
12203  
Vortec  
DirecTV  
Humax  
20739  
20739  
20616  
20739  
20616  
20616  
20739  
DVD  
Voxson  
VU  
10178, 10037  
11365, 12098  
11667  
3D LAB  
Accurian  
Acoustic Solutions  
AEG  
30539  
Panasonic  
Philips  
30675  
Toyoda  
11709  
Walker  
Waltham  
Wansa  
30713  
TRANS-continents  
10556, 10037, 10668,  
11037  
10037, 10668, 11037  
12098  
ReplayTV  
Sonic Blue  
TiVo  
30675  
AFK  
31152  
Transonic  
10037, 10698, 10512,  
11363  
Wards  
10178  
Aiwa  
30533  
Watson  
10037, 10714, 10668,  
11037  
Akai  
30675  
Triad  
10556  
PVR  
Alba  
30539, 30713  
33052  
Trio  
11248  
Wega  
10037  
DirecTV  
Humax  
Panasonic  
Philips  
20739  
20739  
20616  
20739  
Ambiance  
Amstrad  
Anthem  
Triumph  
TVTEXT 95  
Uher  
10556, 10037  
10556  
Welltech  
Weltstar  
10714, 11652  
11037  
30713  
32820  
10037  
Westinghouse  
11755  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
DVD  
DVD  
DVD  
DVD  
Aristona  
ASDA  
30539, 30646  
32213  
30713  
30713  
32587  
30713  
31571  
30713  
30571  
30713  
30503  
30713  
31152  
Elfunk  
30713  
Kennex  
Kenwood  
Lenco  
Lexicon  
LG  
30713  
Orion  
30713  
30713  
30713  
30713  
Elite  
31152  
30490, 30534  
30713, 33052  
32545  
Ormond  
Pacific  
Audix  
Emerson  
EuroLine  
Ferguson  
Finlux  
30675, 32213  
30675  
Autovox  
Awa  
Palladium  
Panasonic  
30713  
30741, 31602  
33052  
30503, 30490, 31579,  
31641, 32523, 32710,  
32859  
Basic Line  
Bel Canto Design  
Black Diamond  
Blue Parade  
Blue Sky  
Brandt  
30741  
Limit  
Firstline  
Foehn & Hirsch  
Funai  
30713  
Lodos  
Loewe  
30713  
Pelican Accessories  
Philco  
30533  
30675  
33052  
30539, 30741, 32474,  
32783  
30675  
Philips  
30503, 30539, 30646,  
30675, 30713, 31340,  
31354, 32056, 32084,  
32434, 32689  
Logik  
30713  
GE  
30522  
Lumatron  
Lunatron  
Luxman  
Luxor  
30741, 30713  
30741  
GFM  
30675  
Bush  
Global Sphere  
Go Video  
GoldStar  
Goodmans  
GPX  
31152  
30573  
Pioneer  
30571, 30142, 30631,  
31571, 32442, 32860  
C-Tech  
30741  
30713  
California Audio Labs 30490  
30741  
Polk Audio  
Presidian  
ProAudio  
Proscan  
Proson  
30539  
Magnavox  
30503, 30539, 30646,  
30675, 30713, 31354  
Cambridge Audio  
Centrum  
Changhong  
Cinetec  
32808  
30713, 31152  
30741  
30675  
30675, 30713  
30627  
Manhattan  
Marantz  
30713  
31394  
Grandin  
Grundig  
H & B  
30713  
30539, 32414, 32432,  
33444  
30522  
30713  
30539, 30713  
30713  
30713  
Clatronic  
Clayton  
30675  
Mark  
30713  
Pye  
30539, 30646  
30741  
30713  
Haaz  
31152  
Matsui  
30713  
Radionette  
Radiotone  
RCA  
Crown  
30713  
Hanseatic  
Harman/Kardon  
Henss  
30741  
Maxim  
MDS  
30713  
30713  
Dantax  
30539, 30713  
30582, 31229, 33228  
30713  
30713  
30522, 30571, 32213,  
32587  
Denon  
30490, 30634, 31634,  
32258, 32748  
Medion  
Memorex  
Metz  
30630, 30741  
32213  
Hitachi  
30573, 30713, 31664  
30713  
REC  
30490  
32213  
31394  
30713  
30623  
30741  
Dick Smith  
Electronics  
31152  
Hoeher  
30571, 30713  
30503, 30539  
30539  
Red  
HotMedia  
Humax  
31152  
Micromedia  
Micromega  
Microsoft  
Minax  
Redstar  
Roadstar  
Rotel  
Digihome  
DigiLogic  
Digix Media  
Disney  
30713  
30646  
30713  
Inno Hit  
Insignia  
30713  
30522, 32083  
30713  
31394  
30741, 30675, 32428,  
32596  
Salora  
Samsung  
30675  
Mitsubishi  
Momitsu  
NAD  
30713  
30490, 30573, 30199,  
30820, 31635, 32069,  
32329, 32489, 33195  
DSE  
30675, 31152  
30713  
Integra  
30503, 30571, 30627,  
31612, 31634, 32147  
33052  
Dual  
30741  
Durabrand  
Dynex  
30675, 30713  
32596  
Irradio  
JVC  
30646  
Sanyo  
30713  
NEC  
30741, 31602  
30503, 30539, 30623,  
30867, 31597, 31602,  
32855  
Schneider  
Schoentech  
Scott  
30539, 30646, 30713  
30713  
Onkyo  
30503, 30627, 31612,  
32147, 30571, 31634  
Dyon  
33052  
eBench  
31152  
31394  
Kendo  
30713  
Oppo  
30575, 32545  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
DVD  
SEG  
DVD  
Blu-ray Disc  
JVC  
DVD-R  
Irradio  
JVC  
30713  
30503  
Toshiba  
30503, 31639, 32277,  
32551, 32705, 33157  
32855  
30646  
Semp  
Sharp  
Lenco  
33052  
31597  
Transonic  
TVE  
31394  
30630, 30675, 30713,  
32250, 32474, 32652,  
32869  
Lexicon  
LG  
32545  
LG  
30741  
30713  
30741, 31602  
33052  
Loewe  
Magnavox  
Medion  
Panasonic  
30741  
United  
30675, 30713, 31152  
30741, 30713  
30503  
Limit  
30646, 30675  
30741  
Sherwood  
Shinsonic  
Silva Schneider  
SilverCrest  
Skantic  
30741, 33052  
30533  
Universum  
Urban Concepts  
Vestel  
Loewe  
32474, 32783  
30675  
Magnavox  
Marantz  
Momitsu  
Onkyo  
30490, 31579, 32523,  
32710, 32859  
30741  
30713  
32414, 32432, 33444  
33052  
31152  
Victor  
31597  
Philips  
Pioneer  
Pye  
30646, 31340  
30631, 32860  
30646  
30539, 30713  
31152  
Vizio  
32563  
32147, 32900, 32910,  
33100, 33101, 33500,  
33501  
SM Electronic  
Smart  
Vtrek  
32587  
30713  
Waltham  
Wellington  
Weltstar  
Wharfedale  
Windsor  
Windy Sam  
Xbox  
30713  
RCA  
30522  
Sony  
30533, 30864, 31033,  
31070, 31431, 31516,  
31633, 32180  
Oppo  
32545  
30713  
Samsung  
Schneider  
Sharp  
30490, 31635  
30646  
Panasonic  
Philips  
31641, 32523, 32859  
32084, 32434, 32689  
30142, 32442  
30199, 33195  
32250, 32474, 32652  
33052  
30713  
30713  
30630, 30675, 32869  
Soundwave  
Star Clusters  
Strato  
30713  
31152  
31152  
30713  
31152  
30630, 30675  
30675  
31394  
30713  
30741  
30741  
32587  
30741  
Pioneer  
Samsung  
Sharp  
30713  
Sony  
31033, 31070, 31431,  
31516, 31633, 32180  
30573  
Sylvania  
Targa  
30675  
30522, 32083  
31152  
Strong  
Sherwood  
Sony  
30741  
XLogic  
Supervision  
Sylvania  
Symphonic  
Tamashi  
Tandberg  
Targa  
31516, 32180  
30675  
Toshiba  
Victor  
31639, 32277, 32551  
31597  
Yamaha  
30490, 30539, 30646,  
30817, 31354, 32298,  
32299  
Sylvania  
TASCAM  
Toshiba  
Vizio  
34004  
Yamaha  
Zenith  
30646  
Zenith  
30503, 30741  
32551, 32705, 33157  
32563  
30741  
Blu-ray Disc  
Ambiance  
Anthem  
HD-DVD  
Integra  
LG  
Yamaha  
32298, 32299  
Tchibo  
33052  
32901, 33104, 33504  
30741  
TCL  
32820  
DVD-R  
Accurian  
Aristona  
Denon  
TCM  
Cambridge Audio  
Denon  
32808  
30675  
30646  
30490  
30675  
30675  
30741  
30741  
31664  
30646  
Microsoft  
Onkyo  
Xbox  
32083  
TEAC  
34004, 30571, 30741,  
30675, 31394  
32258, 32748  
33052  
32901, 33104 33504  
32083  
Dyon  
Technica  
Technics  
30713  
30490  
30713  
30713  
30571  
30522  
Foehn & Hirsch  
Funai  
33052  
Emerson  
Funai  
30675  
TV/DVD Combination  
Techwood  
Teletech  
Harman/Kardon  
Insignia  
33228  
Akai  
11675  
Go Video  
GPX  
30675, 32428, 32596  
Black Diamond  
Blue Sky  
Bush  
11037, 30713  
11037, 30713  
Theta Digital  
Thomson  
Integra  
32147, 32900, 32910,  
33100, 33101, 33500,  
33501  
Hitachi  
Humax  
11037, 10698, 12719,  
30713  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
TV/DVD Combination  
TV/DVD Combination  
Centrum  
Crown  
DMTech  
Dual  
11037, 30713  
Sunstech  
Sylvania  
12001  
11037, 30713  
12001  
10171, 11394, 11864,  
11886, 30630, 30675  
TEAC  
10698  
11037, 30713  
12049  
Technica  
Telefunken  
Teletech  
Thomson  
Toshiba  
United  
11037, 30713  
10698  
Dynex  
Elfunk  
Emerson  
11037, 30713  
11037, 30713  
10625  
11394, 11864, 11886,  
30675  
Ferguson  
Goodmans  
Grandin  
Grundig  
H & B  
11037, 30713  
11037, 30713  
30713  
11524  
11037, 30713  
30713  
Universum  
Vestel  
30539  
11037  
12001  
Viewsonic  
Weltstar  
12049  
Hanseatic  
Hitachi  
Insignia  
JVC  
12001  
11037, 30713  
11037, 11667, 30713  
12049  
12271  
LG  
11423  
Logik  
11037, 30713  
11037, 30713  
12372  
Luxor  
Magnavox  
Matsui  
11037, 30713  
12719  
Medion  
Nordmende  
Odys  
12001  
12719  
Panasonic  
Philips  
12170  
11454, 10556, 11394,  
30539  
Powerpoint  
Prosonic  
Pvision  
RCA  
10698  
12001  
12001  
12746, 12932  
12001  
Schaub Lorenz  
SEG  
11037, 12719, 30713  
10818  
Sharp  
Soniq  
12493  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Memo  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Y1212-1  
SN 29401471CODE  
(C) Copyright 2013 Onkyo Corporation Japan. All rights reserved.  
* 2 9 4 0 1 4 7 1 C O D E *  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 

Multi Tech Systems Network Card MT5656ZDX User Manual
Mustang Survival Life Jacket MD0450 User Manual
National Instruments Network Card NI DMM User Manual
National Instruments Welding System FP AI 112 User Manual
NEC Car Stereo System CDC TO3 User Manual
NEC Flat Panel Television LCD22WMGX User Manual
NordicTrack Treadmill NTTL09712 User Manual
Omron Air Compressor NE C29 E User Manual
Panasonic MP3 Player CQ C8405N User Manual
Partner Tech Chainsaw 530084168 User Manual